394
Reference Manual 2130 RBM Consultant Pro ® Laser Alignment Analyzer and Fixtures Part # 97191 Rev. 1

2130 Laser Alignment

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 2130 Laser Alignment

Reference Manual

2130 RBM Consultant Pro®

Laser AlignmentAnalyzer and Fixtures

Part # 97191 Rev. 1

Page 2: 2130 Laser Alignment

Copyright© 2007 by Emerson Process Management.All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, trans-mitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Emerson Process Management.

DisclaimerThis manual is provided for informational purposes. EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT MAKES NO WAR-RANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR-TICULAR PURPOSE. Emerson Process Management shall not be liable for errors, omissions, or inconsistencies that may be contained herein or for incidental or con-sequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Emerson Process Management. The information in this manual is not all-inclusive and cannot cover all unique situations.

Product SupportShould you have any comments on this documentation or questions concerning the Agreement on the fol-lowing pages, please contact Emerson Process Manage-ment’s Product Support Department.

Addresses:

The Americas and Canada

Emerson Process Management

835 Innovation Drive

Knoxville, TN 37932 USA

Phone: 865-675-4274

FAX: 865-218-1416

[email protected]

Europe and Middle East

Emerson Process Management

Research Park Inerleuvenlaan 50 Leuven 3001 Belgium

Phone: 32/16/74/.14.71

UK 441516779418

FAX: 32/16/74.14.19

[email protected]

Asia Pacific

Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Pte Ltd

1 Pandan Crescent

Singapore 128461

Phone: 65.67708706

FAX: 65.67708006

[email protected]

Worldwide Web:

http://www.MHM.AssetWeb.com

AMS Machinery Manager Reference ManualThis document was written, illustrated, and produced by Emerson Process Management’s Engineering Publi-cations Group on Power Macintosh™ workstations using Adobe™ FrameMaker®, Adobe PhotoShop®, and Macromedia® FreeHand™. Printed copies are produced using the Xerox™ DocuTech™ publishing system.

Trademarks and ServicemarksEmerson Process Management logo; Infranalysis; Infra-Route; MachineView; MotorView; Nspectr; OilView (Japan); AMS Machinery Manager; Reliability-Based Maintenance, and logo; are registered trademarks of Emerson Process Management.

PeakVue; RBMview; AMS Machinery Manager (Aus-tralia, China, Japan); RBMwizard; Reliability-Based Maintenance (Venezuela); SonicScan; SST; VibPro; and VibView are pending trademarks of Emerson Process Management.

Lubricant Profile and Trivector are registered service-marks of Emerson Process Management.

RBM; AMS Machinery Manager (China); Reliability-Based Maintenance (Venezuela); and design are pending servicemarks of Emerson Process Manage-ment.

Adobe is a trademark and FrameMaker and PhotoShop are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc. Power Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. Mac-romedia is a registered trademark and FreeHand is a trademark of Macromedia, Inc. Xerox and DocuTech are trademarks of Xerox Corporation.

ii

Page 3: 2130 Laser Alignment

All other brand or product names are trademarks or reg-istered trademarks of their respective companies.

PatentsThe product(s) described in this manual are covered under existing and pending patents.

License AgreementIMPORTANT: CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT BEFORE OPENING THE PACKAGE OR PROCEEDING WITH INSTALLATION. OPENING THE PACKAGE OR COM-PLETING THE INSTALLATION INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT.

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CON-DITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT, CANCEL ANY INSTALLATION AND PROMPTLY RETURN THIS PRODUCT AND THE ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION TO CSI, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED. NO REFUNDS WILL BE GIVEN FOR PRODUCTS WITH DAMAGED OR MISSING COMPONENTS.

Definition of SoftwareAs used herein, “software” refers to any computer pro-gram contained on any medium. Software includes downloadable firmware for use in devices such as ana-lyzers or MotorStatus units and it includes computer programs executable on computers or computer net-works.

Software LicenseYou have the non-exclusive right to use this software on only one device at a time. You may back-up the soft-ware for archival purposes. For network systems, you have the non-exclusive right to install this software on only one server. Read/write access is limited to the num-ber of concurrent use licenses purchased. The number of guest-only accesses is up to a maximum of 250.

CSI grants you a non-exclusive right to use the Software solely for your own internal data processing operations on the CSI designated supported operating platform for

up to any applicable maximum number of licensed users. You may not relicense the Software or use the Software for third party training, commercial time shar-ing, rental, or service bureau use. Client may not use the Software in, as, or with an ASP (Application Service Pro-vider).

Software UpdatesCSI agrees to provide you, at no charge except for media, preparation and shipping charges, for one (1) year from the date of purchase, all updates to the soft-ware made at the sole discretion of CSI. Should you pur-chase a software support agreement for the next succeeding year following the first year from the date of purchase, and thereafter on an annual basis, and if CSI is still providing support, you may purchase the same, annually, at the then existing rate..

Updates/UpgradesUpon receipt of new CSI software replacing older CSI software, you have 30 days to install and test the new CSI software on the same or a different device. At the end of the 30-day test period, you must both remove and return the new CSI software or remove the older CSI software.

OwnershipThe licensed software and all derivatives are the sole property of Computational Systems, Inc. You may not disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer or otherwise translate the licensed program. You may not distribute copies of the program or documentation, in whole or in part, to another party. You may not in any way distort, or otherwise modify the program or any part of the docu-mentation without prior written consent from CSI.

TransferYou may transfer the software and license to another party only with the written consent of CSI and only if the other party agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If you transfer the program, you must transfer the documentation and any backup copies or transfer only the documentation and destroy any backup copies.

iii

Page 4: 2130 Laser Alignment

CopyrightThe software and documentation are copyrighted. All rights are reserved.

TerminationIf you commit a material breach of this Agreement, CSI may terminate the Agreement by written notice.

Virus DisclaimerCSI uses the latest virus checking technologies to test all its software. However, since no antivirus system is 100% reliable, we strongly advise that you use an anti-virus system in which you have confidence to verify the software is virus-free. CSI makes no representations or warranties to the effect that the licensed software is virus-free.

NO WARRANTYTHE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY

OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIESIN NO EVENT WILL CSI BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DAMAGES,

INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THIS PROGRAM.

THE LICENSEE'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECT

IN WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIAL IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE REPLACEMENT OF THE DISKETTES OR OTHER MEDIA. IN NO EVENT WILL CSI'S LIABILITY EXCEED THE PUR-CHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT.

Export RestrictionsYou agree to comply fully with all laws, regulations, decrees and orders of the Unites States of America that restrict or prohibit the exportation (or re-exportation) of

technical data and/or the direct product of it to other countries, including, without limitation, the U.S. Export Administration Regulations.

U.S. Government RightsWhen provided to the U.S. government, the computer software and related materials and documentation are provided subject to the same license rights as those enu-merated above.

Hardware Technical Help1. Please have the number of the current version of

your firmware ready when you call. The version of the firmware in Emerson Process Management’s CSI 2100 series, CSI 2400, and other analyzers appears on the power-up screen that is displayed when the analyzer is turned on.

2. If you have a problem, explain the exact nature of your problem. For example, what are the error messages? When do they occur? Know what you were doing when the problem occurred. For example, what mode were you in? What steps did you go through? Try to determine before you call whether the problem is repeatable.

Hardware Repair Emerson Process Management repairs and updates its hardware products free for one year from the date of purchase. This service warranty includes hardware improvement, modification, correction, recalibration, update, and maintenance for normal wear. This service warranty excludes repair of damage from misuse, abuse, neglect, carelessness, or modification performed by anyone other than Emerson Process Management.

After the one year service warranty expires, each return of a Emerson Process Management hardware product is subject to a minimum service fee. If the cost of repair exceeds this minimum fee, we will call you with an esti-mate before performing any work. Contact Emerson Process Management’s Product Support Department for information concerning the current rates.

iv

Page 5: 2130 Laser Alignment

Obsolete HardwareAlthough Emerson Process Management will honor all contractual agreements and will make every effort to ensure that its software packages are “backward com-patible,” to take advantage of advances in newer hard-ware platforms and to keep our programs reasonably small, Emerson Process Management reserves the right to discontinue support for old or out-of-date hardware items.

Software Technical Help1. Please have the number of the current version of

your software ready when you call. The version number for software operating under Windows® is displayed by selecting “About” under the Help menu bar item.

2. If you have a problem, explain the exact nature of your problem. For example, what are the error messages? (If possible, make a printout of the error message.) When do they occur? Know what you were doing when the problem occurred. For example, what mode were you in? What steps did you go through? Try to determine before you call whether the problem is repeatable.

3. Please be at your computer when you call. We can serve you better when we can work through the problem together.

Software Technical SupportEmerson Process Management provides technical sup-port through the following for those under support agreement:

• Telephone assistance and communication via the Internet.

• Mass updates that are released during that time.

• Interim updates upon request. Please contact Emerson Process Management Product Support for more information.

Returning Items1. Call Product Support (see page 2) to obtain a return

authorization number. Please write it clearly and prominently on the outside of the shipping container.

2. If returning for credit, return all accessories originally shipped with the item(s). Include cables, software diskettes, manuals, etc.

3. Enclose a note that describes the reason(s) you are returning the item(s).

4. Insure your package for return shipment. Shipping costs and any losses during shipment are your responsibility. 7COD packages cannot be accepted and will be returned unopened.

v

Page 6: 2130 Laser Alignment

vi

Page 7: 2130 Laser Alignment

ContentsHow To Use This Manual · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-1

Emphasis Paragraphs · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-5Analyzer Serialization· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-5UltraMgr Software and Prerequisites · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-6

Standard Equipment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-7Fixtures Case Layout (bottom section) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-7Fixtures Case Layout (top section) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-8

Chapter 2 • Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-4

General Description· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-5Sensor Head Description· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-5

General Maintenance· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-10Care and Handling· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-10Calibration· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-10Battery Charging · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-11

Battery Usage - Laser Heads · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-16

Precautions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-17

Introduction to Laser Alignment Fixtures Setup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-18

Attaching the Fixtures · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-19Attaching the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base · · · · · · · · · · · 2-19Attaching Chain to the Chain Pickup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-20Allowing Maximum Tightening Range · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-21Positioning a Mounting Base · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-22Positioning the Other Mounting Base · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-23Attaching Excess Chain · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-24Using the Chain Clip· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-26Installing a Post · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-27Mounting a Sensor Head· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-28

Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-30Mounting the Other Sensor Head · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-31Communication Between the Fixtures and Analyzer · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-32Connecting the 8000RF Interface · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-34

vii

Page 8: 2130 Laser Alignment

Turn the Laser Beams On· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-40Center the Laser Beams · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-41Rough Alignment of the Laser Beams · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-42

Introduction to Special Applications · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-46

Using Additional Mounting Blocks· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-47Adding a 2-inch (51 mm) Block· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-48Mounting One Bracket on a Coupling · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-50Mounting on Shafts (or Couplings) > 8-inch (203 mm) Diameter · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-51

Using Alternative Mounting Brackets · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-52

Chapter 3 • Horizontal Alignment

Help · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-1Basic Alignment Steps · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-1

Advanced and Basic Laser Align Applications · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-2Advanced Laser Align · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-2Basic Laser Align · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-2

Main Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-3

Three Step Alignment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-5

Main Screen Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-6

Alt Main Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-7

Alt Main Screen Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-8Job Reset· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-11

Basic Mode· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-12

Basic Mode Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-13Job Reset· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-16Machine Configuration Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-18

Laser Align (Alignment) Method Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-20Tolerance Type · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-22Tolerance Type Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-22Laser Configuration Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-24

Laser Address Selection · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-26Check Lasers· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-30Laser Head Status Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-32Job Manager · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-34

viii

Page 9: 2130 Laser Alignment

Job Manager Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-35Edit Job Setup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-38Edit Job Setup Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-39Job Flow · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-42Job Flow Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-43Enter Dimensions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-45Entering Fractions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-51Quick Spec · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-53Entering Thermal Growth Information · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-56Growth at Feet· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-57Growth at Profile· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-59Gap/Offset · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-64Face/Rim · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-68Reverse Dial · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-72Sweep Laser Heads · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-75Foot Pre-Check · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-76Foot Pre-Check Function Keys (after the Foot Pre-Check has been started) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-82Acquiring Alignment Data · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-82Auto Sweep · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-85Manual Sweep· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-94Accept Readings key· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-97Auto 4 Point · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-100Manual 4 Point · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-105Dual Pass· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-111Dual Pass Cable (8215C2-PM) - Models 821500 and 822500 Only · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-119Review Results · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-121Review Results (Measurements) Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-124Sweep Mode Curve Data · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-126Data Quality · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-127Move Machine · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-129Vertical Move · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-130Vertical Move Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-132Horizontal Move · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-135Horizontal Move Function Keys· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-137Dual Move· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-140Extra Foot Calculation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-143Predict Mode · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-145Prediction Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-149Live Move · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-149

ix

Page 10: 2130 Laser Alignment

Data Detail (Tolerance Plots) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-162Data Detail (Tolerance Plot) Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-166Display Sine Fit · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-168Display Sine Fit Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-172View Data · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-174C-face Alignment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-175Notes· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-180Notes Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-180Transferring Alignment Job Data and Tolerances · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-184Tolerances· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-193

UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align Overview · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-194Case Studies · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-195

UltraMgr · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-199UltraMgr Software and Firmware Prerequisites· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-200Tolerances· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-201

Chapter 4 • Vertical Alignment

Help · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-3Basic Vertical Alignment Steps · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-3Three Step Alignment· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-5Vertical Main Screen Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-6

Vertical Alt Main Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-7Vertical Alt Main Screen Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-8Job Reset· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-10Vertical Machine Configuration· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-11Vertical Machine Configuration Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-12Laser Angle Advance · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-13Laser Angle Advance Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-14Vertical Laser Configuration · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-15Vertical Laser Configuration Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-16Vertical Enter Dimensions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-17Define Flange · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-21Define Flange Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-23Custom Pattern · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-25Custom Pattern Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-27Vertical Sweep Laser Heads· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-29Vertical Move Machine · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-38Angular Move· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-39Angular Move Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-40

x

Page 11: 2130 Laser Alignment

Offset Move · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-41Offset Move Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-44Vertical Data Detail (Tolerance Plots) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-45

Chapter 5 • Straightness Measurements

Straightness Main Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-3Three Step Straightness Measurements · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-4Straightness Main Screen Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-5Straightness Alt Main Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-6Straightness Alt Main Screen Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-6Straightness Laser Configuration · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-9Straightness Laser Configuration Function Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-10Straightness Enter Dimensions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-11Straightness Move Laser Heads · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-15Straightness Surface Profile · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-18

Chapter A • Application Information

Alignment Application Notes · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-3Pre-job Preparation and Setup· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-5Changes That Occur During Operation· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-6

Alignment Pitfalls · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-8

Appendix B • Foot Pre-Check Types

Foot Pre-Check Measurement Methods – Soft Foot and Frame Distortion Index (FDI) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · B-1

Appendix C • Technical Specifications

Mounting Posts (part number D23465) for Alignment Brackets · · · · · · · C-3

Appendix D • Accessories and Optional Products

Optional Items for Laser System· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · D-1Other Accessories · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · D-1Recommended Spare Parts* · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · D-2Analyzer Travel/Carrying Cases · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · D-2

xi

Page 12: 2130 Laser Alignment

Batteries/Analyzer Chargers· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·D-2Alignment Fixtures · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·D-2

Customer Support · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·D-3Reliability Services· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·D-4

Glossary

Index

xii

Page 13: 2130 Laser Alignment

Chapter 1

Read This First

How To Use This Manual

This manual is arranged in the following manner:

• Chapter 1 — read this chapter before attempting to use the Model 2130 Laser Alignment program or before proceeding to subsequent chapters.

• Chapter 2 — lists and describes the various components that make up the laser alignment system.

• Chapter 3 — provides general application overview information about pro-cedures used in horizontal shaft alignment.

• Chapter 4 — provides general application overview information about pro-cedures used in vertical shaft alignment.

• Chapter 5 — describes how to perform straightness measurements.• Appendix A — provides general application overview information about pro-

cedures used in shaft alignment.

NoteThis manual covers information specific to the 2130 RBMConsultant Pro Advanced Laser Alignment program.

It is assumed that the user is familiar with the general hardware and operation of the Model 2130 analyzer. If any questions or concerns arise in using the analyzer, refer to the 2130 RBMConsultant Pro, Dual-Channel Machinery Analyzer manual (part number 97017).

• Appendix B — provides descriptions of Foot Pre-Check types and their advantages and disadvantages.

• Appendix C — details the technical specifications for the Model 8215/8225 laser alignment fixtures.

• Appendix D — describes the various accessories and optional products that are available for use with the Laser Align application.

1-1

Page 14: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteIn this manual, “8215” and “8225” (sometimes quoted as “8215/8225”) refer to both the RF versions (Models 821500 and 822500) and the direct-connect only versions (Models 821501 and 822501 ) laser systems except where information specific to one type of laser system is discussed.

1-2

Page 15: 2130 Laser Alignment

Introduction

The UltraSpec Pro 8215/8225 Laser Alignment Fixtures are the latest in a com-plete line of alignment equipment provided by Emerson Process Management. The 8215/8225 system is used in conjunction with the Model 2130 Laser Align pro-gram. Although the Model 2130 analyzer can be purchased separately, it must be used to process the data from the fixtures. The Model 8215/8225 system attaches sensor heads to shafts which are typically coupled. Laser beams are emitted from each sensor head and targeted on the opposite sensor head. Each shaft position is measured in relation to the other shaft by rotating the two shafts. Shaft misalign-ment is calculated from the position of each laser beam on its respective target, at a range of angular positions of the laser heads.

The position of each laser beam on its target transmits from each sensor head to the Model 2130 analyzer through radio frequency (RF) or direct cable communi-cation, depending on the model. The Model 2130 analyzer processes the data and calculates the required machine moves necessary to bring the machine compo-nents into alignment.

With most alignment systems available today, the sag of the alignment fixtures must be considered to accurately calculate machine moves. With the use of laser beams, there is no fixture sag to consider! The RF communication between the sensor heads and the Model 2130 analyzer simplifies data acquisition and reduces oper-ator error. The direct cable connect provides an alternate method to transfer data when the RF link is not practical.

Since each head has a self-contained inclinometer and additional memory, the data can be acquired through a variety of methods. Choices range from the tradi-tional top, bottom, left, and right locations (minimum of three) - where the fixtures interact directly with the analyzer to the patented partial sweep method (the sensor heads memorize the data and later dump it to the analyzer).

When the 8215/8225 fixtures and the 2130 Laser Align program are used with the UltraMgr PC software program, a complete alignment program can be managed from a centralized location. UltraMgr provides job tracking, control of alignment tolerances, alignment history and much more.

1-3How To Use This Manual

Page 16: 2130 Laser Alignment

Some advantages of the UltraSpec Pro 8215/8225 Laser Alignment Fixtures are:

• Easy setup

• No fixture sag

• Visible laser to assist with rough alignments

• Large diameter mounting range

• Large span range between sensor heads

• Large vertical expansion to clear larger couplings

• Large misalignment measurement range

• Partial revolutions (down to 45°)

• Dual Pass method for uncoupled alignments

• Real time machine move monitoring, vertical and horizontal

• Soft foot locator

• Radio frequency communication

• Direct cable connect, if needed

• Automatic data acquisition

• Dual beam technology

• Internal angle sensors

• Internal memory

• 45-minute charge cycle for sensor heads

• Simultaneously charging, sensor heads and analyzer

• Best ambient light protection

• Vertical machine alignment

• Straightness measurement

1-4

Page 17: 2130 Laser Alignment

Emphasis Paragraphs

Two different types of paragraphs are used throughout this manual to call attention to the adjacent text:

NoteThe note paragraph indicates special comments or instructions.

Caution!The caution paragraph alerts you to actions that may have a major impact, such as lost data or damage to the analyzer or its accessories.

Warning!The warning paragraph warns you of actions that could cause serious personal injury or death.

Analyzer Serialization

The loaded firmware has been serialized and is matched to the analyzer serial number. If the firmware and analyzer serial numbers do not match, contact Product Support.

1-5How To Use This Manual

Page 18: 2130 Laser Alignment

UltraMgr Software and Prerequisites

NoteYour AMS™ Suite: Machinery Health™ Manager software and Model 2130 RBMCONSULTANT PRO must have compatible software.

RequirementsModel 2130 RBMCONSULTANT PRO firmware version v.6.3.8.0 or later.

The following, 4.90 or later, AMS™ Suite: Machinery Health™ Manager files - dated 08/08/2005 or later:

• RBMcom.exe

• RBMcomSr.exe

• XFrAlg.dll

• UltraAlg.exe

UltraMgr requires some planning and setup before jobs can be down-loaded into this alignment program. Refer to the appropriate UltraMgr user’s manual for more information on communicating with the PC.

1-6

Page 19: 2130 Laser Alignment

Standard Equipment

When checking the kit to ensure that everything ordered was shipped, compare the contents of the package to your shipping invoice. For additional assistance, refer to the following fixtures case layouts. If a discrepancy is found, call Emerson Customer Support at (865) 671-4274.

Fixtures Case Layout (bottom section)

NoteSome parts shown in these illustrations may be optional in different packages.

1-7Standard Equipment

Page 20: 2130 Laser Alignment

Fixtures Case Layout (top section)

1-8

Page 21: 2130 Laser Alignment

Chapter 2

Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Special Instructions About the 8215/8225 Laser Fixtures

Warning!Prior to mounting the laser alignment fixtures on machine shafts, all switches operating the machines should be “locked out” (follow lockout procedures for your facility). On completion of the align-ment, inspect the work area to ensure that all equipment is clear of rotating shafts and couplings, prior to removal of the lockout protec-tion.

Warning!The 8215/8225 Laser Alignment Fixtures use a Class II (CDRH) laser or Class 2 (IEC) laser. This laser complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 safety requirements with a power output < 1.0 mW (average) and a pulse repetition of 600 pulses/sec. The pulse duration is <110 microseconds. However, do not expose the human eye directly to the laser beam! Warnings are located on each sensor head.

Warning!Using the controls or adjustments in ways other than specified in this documentation may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure. Making the hardware, firmware, or software perform in ways other than specified in this documentation may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.

2-1

Page 22: 2130 Laser Alignment

Laser heads, front view

Laser heads, rear view

2-2 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 23: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteOnly the Models 821501 and 822501 direct-connect only laser sys-tems have CE approval.

Laser radiation caution

2-3

Page 24: 2130 Laser Alignment

Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only

NoteOperation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.

NoteThis equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide a reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commer-cial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Caution!Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Emerson could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Caution!This device has been designed to operate solely with the antenna type provided, Emerson part number 88200. An antenna having a higher gain is strictly pro-hibited per regulations of Industry Canada.

2-4 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 25: 2130 Laser Alignment

General Description

Sensor Head Description

This section describes both the old and current versions of the 8215/8225 laser heads. The older version of heads can be identified by their gray front panels and black grid lines. The current version of heads have different color front panels. Head A has a gray front panel with white grid lines and blue on/off buttons, while head B has a blue front panel with white grid lines and gray on/off buttons.

NoteThroughout the manual, photos may contain images of either the older or current versions of laser heads.

1

RF Antenna

RF AntennaHousing

DirectConnectPort

Targets(PSD’s)

SensorHead ID

LaserSource

ChargingPort

HorizontalLaser Adjustment

VerticalLaser Adjustment

PowerButton

PostGrip

ActivityLED

Laser HeadModel #

2-5General Description

Page 26: 2130 Laser Alignment

The sensor head with the laser source on top is the Master head (known as head “A”). The other head is the Slave (known as head “B”). The model number is listed on the back of each head. They can be identified by the letter A or B on the front.

There are no differences between the older and current versions of the 8215/8225 laser heads with the exception of the front panels and batteries. The older version is powered by nickel cadmium (NiCad) batteries, while the current version is pow-ered by Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) batteries.

The difference between the Model 8215 sensor heads and the 8225 sensor heads are the target (Position Sensing Detector or PSD) size, laser distance, and the front overlay. The 8215 sensor head has a 10mm x 10mm PSD and a laser which allows alignments over a sensor spacing up to 30 feet, or 9 meters. The 8225 sensor head has a 20mm x 20mm PSD and a laser which allows alignments over a sensor spacing up to 100 feet (30.5 meters).

Although the direct-connect only laser system (Model 821501 and 822501) is not illustrated in this manual, the only difference between it and the RF laser system (Models 821500 and 822500) is that the RF system transmits information using either the RF or direct-connect communication. The direct-connect only laser system uses only the direct-connect communication. For this reason, the direct-con-nect only laser systems do not have an RF antenna or antenna housing.

2-6 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 27: 2130 Laser Alignment

The Activity LED on the front panel can be red, yellow, or green. An explanation of their meaning is shown in the following table.

Table 1: LED Status Meaning Required Action

Green Yellow Red

X

Normal Operation - When the Laser Head systems are all functioning properly and the laser beam from the companion Laser Head is striking the PSD in the linear region. This is the desired state. The Laser Head is in the acceptable condition to perform an alignment.

No Action Required

X (flashing)

Sensor head in standby (sleep) mode - When the Laser Head sees no activity for five minutes, they automatically enter Sleep Mode to conserve battery power. The color will be the one that was active, solid or flashing, before this state was entered. When this sleep mode is entered, the LED will be flashed off for 1.5 sec. and on for 0.5 sec.

Use analyzer to wake up when needed by initiating communication with the laser heads.

X

Minor Error* Refer to “(6) Laser Head Status Screen” on page 3-16 for more information on the error and the required action.

2-7General Description

Page 28: 2130 Laser Alignment

* If a minor error is present, the data being acquired may be marginal. The data quality will depend on the error. If a major error is present, then some kind of hard-ware or system problem exists. Therefore, the data being acquired is rejected.

X (flashing)

Low battery 1st warning (sensor head) - The Laser Head has the ability to monitor its own battery power. The battery power is checked periodically to determine if it is below the minimum acceptable power. When the battery power reaches 4.8 volts, the LED will be flashed off for 0.5 sec. and then flashed on for 0.5 sec. Data is accepted when the battery is this state.

Recharge sensor heads.

XMajor Error* Refer to “(6) Laser Head Status

Screen” on page 3-16 for more information on the error and the required action.

X (flashing)

Low battery 2nd/final warning (sensor head) - The Laser Head has the ability to monitor its own battery power. The battery power is checked periodically to determine if it is below the minimum acceptable power. When the battery power reaches 4.2 volts, the LED will be flashed off for 0.5 sec. and then flashed on for 0.5 sec. Data is not accepted when the battery is this state.

Recharge sensor heads.

Table 1: LED Status Meaning Required Action

Green Yellow Red

2-8 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 29: 2130 Laser Alignment

LED Functionality Difference Due to Dual Pass modeThe functionality of the LED differs slightly from the states described in the above table when the Dual Pass mode of operation is selected. The difference lies in the LED state when the companion Laser Heads laser beam is on the PSD. In Dual Pass mode, when the laser beam is on or off of the PSD the LED will be a solid yellow, even when the beam is in the linear portion of the PSD. The beam will then flash to green whenever a valid data point is acquired. This deviation is necessary to allow for the indication to the user that the Laser Heads are acquiring data as they are rotated past each other.

NoteTo determine the actual error, select the Check Lasers option on the Alt screen. This will activate the Laser Heads Status screen. If an error condition actually exists, its type will be shown in a popup window within 60 seconds. Refer to the Check Lasers section for more infor-mation.

2-9General Description

Page 30: 2130 Laser Alignment

General Maintenance

Care and Handling

To ensure satisfactory service from this system, follow these procedures:

• Keep the mounting base and chain mounting posts lightly oiled to prevent them from corroding.

• To maintain repeatability and accuracy, avoid dropping fixture items. Refer to the Customer Assistance section for repair, update, and calibration.

• Do not subject system items to large temperature swings.

• Do not engrave on the sensor heads.

• Keep all lens free of grease, dirt, oil, and other smudges.

• Clean the laser and target lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and standard lens cleaning solution (a field size cleaner container is available from Emerson). Never use an organic solvent such as a thinner or benzine.

• Store sensor heads in protective hard-shell carrying case when not in use.

Calibration

The Model 8215/8225 calibration should be checked every two years. Return the sensor heads to Emerson for a calibration check. All calibrations are NIST trace-able.

Caution!Do not remove the CSI Quality label on the back of the sensor head. This will void your warranty.

2-10 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 31: 2130 Laser Alignment

Battery Charging

Batteries must be charged with the Model 8211charger. The Model 8211 charger is a “smart, drop-in” charger that can provide a fast- or trickle-charge for the laser heads and analyzer.

This section describes both the old and current version of the 8211 charger. The older version of the 8211 charger can be identified by its solid gray front panel. The current version of the 8211 charger also uses a gray motif on the front panels, but the area around the Fast and Discharge buttons is blue.

Model 8211 Smart ChargerThe Model 8211 charger provides all battery charging needs and comes with the system. It is a “smart, drop in” charger for the laser heads; it will also charge the ana-lyzer when plugged into a cable. The following picture shows both of the laser heads and the analyzer being charged.

Charging the Sensor Heads and Analyzer with Model 8211 Charger.

2-11General Maintenance

Page 32: 2130 Laser Alignment

The current version of the 8211 charger will charge both the former and current versions of the 8215/8225 laser heads but at a slower charge rate than the older ver-sion of the 8211 charger. The former version of the 8211 charger charges the former version of the 8215/8225 laser heads, but it will only trickle charge the cur-rent version of the 8215/8225 laser heads. Although no damage will occur if the Fast Charge cycle is initiated, this cycle will not work for the current version of the laser heads.

To set up the 8211 charger, complete these steps:

1. . . plug the power cord into the power supply,2. . . plug the power cord into an AC receptacle,3. . . plug the power supply into the 8211 charger in the top end cap.

At that time, the beeper will sound indicating that power has been applied to the battery charger. As a test, all LEDs will illuminate for 1.5 seconds.

4. . . Plug the analyzer charging cable into the bottom end cap.The sensor heads and analyzer can now be charged either individually or, all at the same time.

Charging the Sensor Heads with the Model 8211 ChargerDrop them over the posts so that the head faces outward as shown in the previous illustration. Heads can be charged individually or together.

Indicator Light Charging Status

Pending Waiting for safe voltage and temperature

Discharge (steady) Batteries discharging

Discharge (flashing) Discharge requested, waiting for safe voltage or temperature

Fast (steady) Batteries in fast charge

Fast (flashing) Fast charge requested, waiting for safe voltage or temperature

Trickle Batteries in trickle charge, topping-off, or charge complete

2-12 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 33: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteThe discharge cycle is intended for older versions of the laser heads, powered by Nickel Cadmium (NiCad) batteries. This function is not required for the current version of the laser heads, powered by Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) batteries. However, use of this function on laser heads with NiMH batteries will not result in any damage to the heads or charger.

For maximum safety, the battery charger has a Pending status LED, which lights momentarily when the head is first placed on the charger. If a battery is very low, or is out of a specific temperature range, it cannot be safely charged. When this con-dition occurs the Pending indicator remains illuminated. While Pending, the charger is actually charging the batteries at a very low rate in an attempt to charge the low battery to an acceptable voltage range. Once the battery temperature and voltage are suitable for charging, the charger automatically begins trickle charging and the Trickle indicator light turns on.

To fast charge or discharge the battery the Fast button or Discharge button must be pressed. If the Fast button or Discharge button is pressed while the battery voltage is too low or temperature is not suitable for Fast or Discharge operation, the indicator light will flash on and off. This response acknowledges the request but indicates that the charger cannot fulfill the request at that time. Once voltage and temperature conditions are suitable, the requested Fast or Discharge operation will begin and the indicator light will change to a steady light.

Caution!Note that if the battery is fully charged, a user is able to initiate fast charge by pressing the Fast button. After about 2 minutes, the charger will stop fast charge in this case. However, to avoid overcharging batteries, you should not press the Fast button with an already fully charged battery.

2-13General Maintenance

Page 34: 2130 Laser Alignment

After the Fast charging cycle has completed, the charger’s beeper sounds and the charger automatically begins trickle charging. When this condition begins, the Trickle indicator light turns on indicating that the battery is almost completely charged, or is completely charged. For the laser head batteries, the two conditions occur within a few minutes of each other. Charge time from a fully discharged set of batteries to approximately a 90% voltage charge is 45 minutes (current version of the 8211 charger) and 15 minutes for the former version of the 8211 Charger.

If the Discharge cycle has been initiated, on completion the charger automatically begins fast charging and the Fast indicator light turns on. If charging a former ver-sion of the laser heads that contain NiCad batteries - to avoid the battery memory concern use the Discharge mode when you have more than 20 minutes to charge the sensor head batteries. The typical charge cycle is as follows:

NoteAfter power has been applied to the charger and the sensor head(s) placed in it, if none of the LED's for that sensor head are lit then the contact between the sensor head and charger may not be sufficient to charge the batteries. No LED's lit indicates a “no battery present” state. If this takes place, remove the sensor head from the charger and try reseating it back into the charger.

Action Time

Press DISCHARGE button Start

DISCHARGE complete, FAST starts 7 minutes

FAST complete, TRICKLE starts – charging complete 22 minutes

NOTE: The heads can be left on TRICKLE indefinitely (until the next time they are needed).

2-14 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 35: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteAfter a charging cycle begins, if that charging cycle is interrupted (e.g. disconnecting the power to the charger or removing the sensor head from the charger) the charging process described above initiates from the beginning. Therefore, if the charger cycle is interrupted while the Fast charge mode is in progress, then the charger automat-ically begins trickle charging after Pending(see below).

The “Pending LED” lights momentarily and switches into Fast charge. Charge time for a fully discharged set of batteries is 45 minutes (for the current version of the 8211 charger) and 15 minutes for the former version of the 8211 charger. The beeper will sound when both heads are fully charged and the charger switches to trickle.

Charging the Analyzer with the Model 8211 ChargerCharging functions for the 8117, 2120 and 2130 analyzers are identical for both the former and current versions of the 8211 charger.

Plug the charging cable (A821102) from the bottom end cap on the 8211 charger into the charger port on the top end cap of the analyzer. The battery pack will recharge in three hours. After the battery pack has been fully charged, the battery charger automatically switches to a trickle charge.

2-15General Maintenance

Page 36: 2130 Laser Alignment

Battery Usage - Laser Heads

Power is supplied to each sensor head via a rechargeable battery pack. A fully charged battery pack provides five to six hours of continuous service while transmit-ting data. Longer operation is possible since typical alignments do not require con-tinuous communication with the analyzer. The battery is designed to have a long life and is not intended to be replaced by the user. Replacement should be per-formed only at Emerson. Emerson recommends that the batteries be replaced after 500 charges.

To conserve battery life, the 8215/8225 has a sleep mode and a shutdown mode. The sleep mode is activated after 5 minutes of no communication with the analyzer. In the sleep mode, the laser beam and RF communication are shutdown until com-munication is reestablished. All data in memory is saved. In the auto-shutdown mode, the sensor heads are completely shutdown. The Power Button starts the sensor heads again. All data in memory is lost, therefore another sweep should be taken.

The sleep and auto-shutdown modes can be disabled. To disable the sleep mode on each laser head, with the laser heads off, press and hold the Power Buttons. This will cause the laser heads and their corresponding LED’s to power on for approxi-mately two seconds. Then laser heads and their corresponding LED’s will power off for approximately three seconds. After the laser heads and their corresponding LED’s power back on again, the shutdown mode will be disabled. To re-enable the sleep mode, just power the heads off.

NotePlease note that this disables the battery conservation (for the sensor heads) therefore, if the heads are left on, the batteries will run down.

2-16 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 37: 2130 Laser Alignment

Precautions

Please follow these precautions carefully. Any product damage due to these condi-tions may void the warranty.

• Use only Emerson-supplied battery chargers that have been approved for use with the analyzer and Model 8215/8225 laser heads. The use of any other charger will most likely damage the equipment.

• Do not use Emerson battery chargers with anything other than the product for which they are designed. Do not use the 8211 charger to charge any-thing else!

• Do not use any batteries other than those included and/or specified for the analyzer and 8215/8225 laser heads.

• Do not connect a printer directly to the RS232 port located on the top panel of the analyzer.

• Do not connect any adapters or accessories to the RS232 port located on the top panel of the analyzer while the analyzer is turned on.

• Do not start the machines being aligned with the laser alignment system equipment attached. Be sure to remove the laser system before starting the machinery.

2-17Precautions

Page 38: 2130 Laser Alignment

Introduction to Laser Alignment Fixtures Setup

This section takes you through a step-by-step setup of the 8215/8225 Laser Align-ment Fixtures. Before before beginning the actual machine alignment, be sure all pre-alignment checks have been completed.

Warning!Prior to mounting the laser alignment fixtures on machine shafts, all switches operating the machines should be locked out. Follow safety precautions for your facility. Normally, only personnel performing the alignment should be able to unlock any startup switch. After an alignment has been completed, the work area should be inspected to ensure that all equipment is clear of rotating shafts/couplings prior to removal of the lockout protection.

Warning!The 8215/8225 Laser Alignment Fixtures use a Class II (CDRH) laser or Class 2 (IEC) laser. This laser complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 safety requirements with a power output < 1.0 mW (average) and a pulse repetition of 600 pulses/sec. The pulse duration is <110 microseconds. However, do not expose the human eye directly to the laser beam! Warnings are located on each sensor head.

Water vapor or dust can interfere with a target “seeing” its laser. The air between the sensor heads should be visually clear. Ensure that the air between the sensor heads is not being heated from steam leaks, uninsulated piping, etc. Heated air rising within the span between the sensor heads can refract the laser beams and cause errors in the alignment readings.

Operate the laser fixtures at ambient temperatures. If the fixtures have been stored at a different temperature than ambient, allow the laser fixtures to acclimate to ambient. Ensure that any heat source that may be present is not creating a large temperature difference between the laser fixtures and the ambient temperature. Sunlight itself will not cause a laser reading problem.

2-18 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 39: 2130 Laser Alignment

Attaching the Fixtures

This section shows how to attach and secure the mounting base, chains, align the two mounting bases by leveling, install the sensor heads, turn on the sensor heads, and center the lasers on their targets.

Attaching the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base

The B821007 3/4 inch (19mm) wide carbon steel mounting bracket is suitable for the majority of alignment jobs where the laser fixtures can be rigidly mounted to a shaft that can be rotated freely.

Select the chain tightener of choice. The right photograph shows a knurled nut which can be tightened by hand. The hex nut mechanism provides a more stable, versatile mounting while the knurled nut is more convenient. Use each nut as shown.

2

These photographs illustrate how the chain assembly should be slipped into the mounting base. Hold the chain out away from the base and slip the cylinder into its cradle. To ensure maximum tightening range, each nut should be flush with the end of the tightening bolt.

Standard Nut Knurled Knob

2-19Attaching the Fixtures

Page 40: 2130 Laser Alignment

Attaching Chain to the Chain Pickup

This photograph illustrates how the chain attaches and actually clamps the shaft. The base is placed on the shaft (or coupling) and a link of the chain is slipped into the chain pickup to secure the base to the shaft. After slipping a chain link into the chain pickup, tighten the bolt at the end of the chain.

2-20 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 41: 2130 Laser Alignment

Allowing Maximum Tightening Range

To allow for maximum tightening range, ensure that the chain nut is flush with the end of the chain bolt (as shown by arrow). Notice that the chain bolts are on oppo-site sides. As shown in later sections, each mounting base can be installed on either end and the chain bolts placed on either side of the shaft.

2-21Attaching the Fixtures

Page 42: 2130 Laser Alignment

Positioning a Mounting Base

Tighten one of the mounting bases and rotate it (along with the shaft) until it is somewhat level at the top of the rotation. To tighten the mounting base, use a 9/16 inch wrench or your hand, depending on which chain tightener is being used.

Caution!Do not overtighten the chain — the maximum tightening torque is 10 ft.-lbs.

2-22 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 43: 2130 Laser Alignment

Positioning the Other Mounting Base

With the previous mounting base still in its level position, if necessary, loosen and rotate the other mounting base until it is somewhat level with it. Tighten this base and recheck the other base to ensure that both are now level in relation to one another.

Although this part of the procedure is not absolutely critical, placing the mounting bases relatively level with each other allows the laser beam adjustment to be more or less centered. This ensures that the laser beams can line up with their targets easily.

Also, there may be times when the top position is not accessible. The objective of this step is to mount the sensor heads in the same rotational position. This provides the maximum rotational range for the sensor during data acquisition.

2-23Attaching the Fixtures

Page 44: 2130 Laser Alignment

Attaching Excess Chain

One of the problems with using chains as a mounting bracket is that the excess chain flops and can cause errors. CSI’s Laser Alignment Fixtures provide solutions for this problem.

Two slots are provided (one on either side) to take up the slack. As shown in the following photographs, you can use either or both of the slots as needed. The order of use is not important. In fact, the L-slot cannot be used when mounting to shafts (or couplings) greater than 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter. When fastening the chain into the T-shaped slot, the rubber block will hold the chain in place.

The photograph below illustrates using the T-shaped slot; see the following page for an example using the L-shaped slot.

Using the T-shaped Slot

2-24 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 45: 2130 Laser Alignment

Using the L-shaped Slot

Caution!Do not attach excess chain prior to tightening the mounting base chain bolts. Doing so may cause damage to the L and T-shaped slots.

2-25Attaching the Fixtures

Page 46: 2130 Laser Alignment

Using the Chain Clip

You will almost always have a little extra chain left over. In that case, use the chain clip (part number D22745) to attach it to the previous chain loop. Emerson recom-mends that you use this clip to help prevent the chain from sliding out of the L-slot as the shafts are rotated.

2-26 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 47: 2130 Laser Alignment

Installing a Post

Screw a mounting post (part number D23465) into each of the outer holes in the mounting base. Tighten each post with the supplied tightener (Phillips screw-driver) or with a 1/8 inch Allen wrench (not supplied with kit).

2-27Attaching the Fixtures

Page 48: 2130 Laser Alignment

Mounting a Sensor Head

NoteThe gray sensor head with the laser source on top is designated head “A”. The “B” designation is attached to the blue sensor head with the laser source on the bottom. In addition to their color difference, head A and B are identified with letters on the front panel.

Place a sensor head on the two posts. It does not matter on which side Head A or Head B is mounted — the heads will be configured in the analyzer. Adjust to desired position and tighten each post clamp finger tight. The mounting posts allow up to 1.5 inches (38 mm) of vertical adjustment. If more vertical adjustment is needed, use the vertical extension blocks. See “Introduction to Special Applications” on page 2-46 through “Adding a 2-inch (51 mm) Block” on page 2-48 for additional information.

2-28 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 49: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteLonger mounting posts are not available. However, if you wish to make your own, refer to the mechanical drawing of a mounting post in the section entitled “Mounting Post (part number D23465) For Alignment Brackets” in Appendix B.

2-29Attaching the Fixtures

Page 50: 2130 Laser Alignment

Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only

Depending on the clearance around which the laser head will be rotated, the posi-tion of the RF antenna may have to be adjusted. When the antenna is in its most upright position it extends up above the top of the laser head. Holding the antenna housing (not the antenna itself), rotate or twist the antenna down (or up depending on its starting position) to its desired position. The antenna’s rotational arc is 30 degrees. When the antenna is in the down position it does not extend above the top of the laser head.

3

2-30 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 51: 2130 Laser Alignment

Mounting the Other Sensor Head

Install the opposite sensor head in the same manner (Head A or Head B, depending on which sensor head was mounted on the other side).

2-31Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only

Page 52: 2130 Laser Alignment

Communication Between the Fixtures and Analyzer

The analyzer conducts communication with the fixtures via a short-range, low-power radio frequency (RF) carrier (916.5 MHz) or by cable.

Radio Frequency (Models 821500 and 822500 only) - With RF, communication occurs in much the same manner as with other short-range wireless systems (for example, cordless phones) — a direct line-of-sight communication is not required.

A typical operating range of up to 50 feet (15 meters) can be achieved using RF communication, but this range is greatly influenced by building construction mate-rials and contents, other radio systems operating in the vicinity at or near the same operating frequency, and noise generated by nearby equipment. It is not unusual to achieve four times the typical operating range in electrically quiet environment or to achieve less than the typical operating range in an electrically noisy environ-ment.

NoteThis equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide a reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commer-cial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Caution!Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Emerson could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

There may be times when an RF communication between each sensor head and the analyzer is not convenient. Moving or keeping the analyzer closer to the laser heads can minimize this inconvenience.

2-32 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 53: 2130 Laser Alignment

The sensor heads have memory for saving alignment readings. If communication with the analyzer is broken during rotation (while using the Auto Sweep mode), these readings are stored in memory until they can be transmitted. When the sensor head is turned off, the memory data is erased.

If the analyzer is out of range of one or both sensor heads or if some sort of RF inter-ference is occurring, it will repeatedly attempt to communicate with the sensor heads. A message will be displayed on the analyzer until the communication link is established.

When communication using RF becomes difficult, Emerson recommends that you use the Direct Connect link as described in “Direct Connect (All Models)” on page 2-36.

2-33Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only

Page 54: 2130 Laser Alignment

Connecting the 8000RF Interface

Attaching 8000RF to 25-pin Connector

Install the 8000RF Interface onto the serial port of the analyzer by completing the following steps:

1. . . Ensure that the Model 2130 analyzer is turned off.2. . . Connect the 25-pin connector of the 8000RF Interface to the RS-232 port on

the Model 2130 analyzer.3. . . Turn the Model 2130 analyzer on.

2-34 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 55: 2130 Laser Alignment

Caution!Do not rotate or twist the antenna on the 8000RF Interface. Attempting to do so will damage the unit.

The Attached 8000RF Interface.

2-35Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only

Page 56: 2130 Laser Alignment

Direct Connect (All Models)Direct Connect is designed for those conditions where it is difficult to communi-cate between the analyzer and the sensor heads using RF. Conditions such as building construction materials and contents, other radio systems operating in the vicinity at or near the same operation frequency, and noise generated by nearby equipment all may make RF communication unsatisfactory.

NoteBoth the A800001 and A821510 Direct Connect cables will work with the 8215/8225 laser heads for all modes of operation where commu-nication between the laser heads and analyzer are necessary, except for the Dual Pass mode. Only the A821510 cable can be used for the Dual Pass mode when using direct-connect communication.

2-36 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 57: 2130 Laser Alignment

To use Direct Connect, complete these steps:

1. . . Make sure the analyzer is turned off.2. . . Attach the 25-pin connector of the direct connect cable to the RS232 port on

top of the analyzer. 3. . . Connect the Lemo connectors of the direct connect cable to the mating

straight Lemo connector on the extension cables, if applicable.

NoteWhen connecting the Lemo connector to its mating connector, line up the red dots located on each connector with each other before completing the connections. To complete the connection, push the connectors together. Do not twist.

4. . . Connect the Lemo connector on the opposite end of the cable to the Lemo port under the nose of each 8215/8225.

NoteWhen connecting the Lemo connector to its mating connector, line up the red dots located on each connector with each other before completing the connections. To complete the connection, push the connectors together. Do not twist.

5. . . Turn the analyzer on.From this point on, Direct Connect is very easy to use. The analyzer determines that it is connected and disables the RF communication (Models 821500 and 822500 only). Cables can be unplugged and reconnected at any time (and at any connec-tion). You do not have to remember which cable is plugged to which head. Even if you switch the orientation of the cables (when reconnecting), the analyzer can adjust to the change and will still work correctly.

2-37Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only

Page 58: 2130 Laser Alignment

4

Caution!When using any cable connector inside the sensor head connector, do not turn or twist the connector. This will shear the cable pins off (inside the connector) totally disabling the sensor head and cable. Pull the cable connector completely out of the sensor head connector before turning the cable.

The direct connect cable is 5 feet (1.5 m) long with “pigtail” style cable. When standing between the sensor heads, a 6 feet (1.8 m) span can be aligned, depending on the diameter of the shaft. Extension cables, Model 800002 and Model 800003, are available for longer spans, larger diameter shafts, or if you cannot stand directly in the middle.

2-38 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 59: 2130 Laser Alignment

The extension cables are eight feet (2.4 meters) long. With two extension cables and the connection pigtail, the total length is 13 feet (4 meters). When standing between the sensor heads, a 22 foot (6.7 meters) span can be aligned, depending on the diameter of the shaft.

5

NoteWith the 8215, a maximum distance of 30 feet (9 m) between the laser heads can be achieved. With the 8225, a maximum distance of 100 feet (30.5 m) between laser heads can be achieved.

2-39Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only

Page 60: 2130 Laser Alignment

Turn the Laser Beams On

To turn the laser beams on, press the power button on each sensor head. See “Bat-tery Usage - Laser Heads” on page 2-16 for power button options.

Warning!Although the laser in the 8215/8225 system is low in intensity (< 1.0 mW), never direct the beam at a human eye. Use of controls, or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those speci-fied by Emerson may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure. To do so could result in serious personal injury. Always ensure that the sensor heads are mounted securely before turning on the laser beam.

2-40 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 61: 2130 Laser Alignment

Center the Laser Beams

Center both Lasers on their associated target by adjusting the thumb wheels on the front of each sensor head.

Vertical Adjustment Horizontal Adjustment

2-41Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only

Page 62: 2130 Laser Alignment

Rough Alignment of the Laser Beams

Rough alignment may be required to keep the laser beam on the target as the fix-tures are rotated. Either of these methods can be used:

• Visible Beam rough alignment — utilizes the visible laser beams without the use of the analyzer

• Partial Sweep rough alignment — utilizes the partial sweep capabilities of the analyzer

Visible Beam Rough AlignmentThis adjustment must be performed in each of the movement planes (typically horizontal and vertical, when required). A horizontal adjustment is illustrated in the following figure; duplicate the actions for vertical adjustments.

Rough Horizontal Laser Beam Adjustments

1. Center laser beamsin respective targets

3. Estimate distancemoved by laser beam

Laser beamposition afterheads havebeen rotated180°

4. Move machine to positionbeams approximately half distanceback toward center of target

2. Rotate laserheads 180°

..

2-42 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 63: 2130 Laser Alignment

The gridlines on the front panel should assist you in determining the approximate movement(s) needed to rough the machines in. Gridline spacing is 0.3 inches (7.5 mm). The following table shows recommended moves based upon the gross move-ment of the laser beam on the sensor head. Gross movements are discussed in ver-tical terms for simplicity.

6

2-43Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only

Page 64: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteThere will, of course, be combinations of the movements shown in the previous table. However, these recommendations should provide some general guidelines.

Partial Sweep Rough AlignmentIn this method, you must use the fixtures and set the analyzer to Manual Sweep or Auto Sweep mode. Either method can provide an effective target area much larger than the 20 mm x 20 mm surface area. If the fixtures can be rotated and both beams remain on target greater than 90° (recommended) of the sweep, the analyzer can produce an alignment solution from the data taken. Data gathered from the portion of the sweep that the laser beams were off target is rejected. For more infor-mation about sweep data collection modes, see Chapter 6.

Gross MovementRecommended Machine Move

at Gearbox at Motor

Small Large, down

Angular & Offset – add shims under the inboard Gearbox feet or remove shims from the outboard Gearbox feet.

Large, down

Small Angular & Offset – add shims under the inboard Motor feet or remove shims from the outboard Motor feet.

Large, up Large, down

Offset – add shims to all feet of the Gearbox or remove shims from all feet of the Motor.

Large, down

Large, up Offset – add shims to all feet of the Motor or remove shims from all feet of the Gearbox.

Large, up Large, up Angular – add shims under the outboard feet of both machines or remove shims from the inboard feet of both machines.

Large down Large down Angular – remove shims from the outboard feet of both machines or add shims under the inboard feet of both machines.

2-44 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 65: 2130 Laser Alignment

This procedure also works when using the Dual Pass mode.

NoteRoughing in the machine so that the laser beam is kept on the target (PSD) as the laser fixtures are rotated can be quicker with a larger PSD (e.g. with the 20x20mm PSD on the 8225 laser fixtures).

2-45Models 821500 and 822500 RF Laser Systems Only

Page 66: 2130 Laser Alignment

Introduction to Special Applications

This section covers using additional mounting blocks, mounting on large diame-ters ( shafts > 8 inches (203 mm), and using alternative mounting brackets. Nor-mally, additional blocks are used to achieve greater coupling clearance. In some cases, you may find that one (or both) of the mounting blocks must be installed on the coupling itself. For larger diameter shafts (or mounting on a coupling), addi-tional lengths of chain may also be needed to mount the base.

2-46 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 67: 2130 Laser Alignment

Using Additional Mounting Blocks

Additional 1-inch, 2-inch, and 4-inch (25 mm, 51 mm, and 102 mm) mounting blocks are available for greater coupling clearances when using the B821007 carbon steel mounting bracket and the A800052 soft-mount (non-rotational) mounting bracket.

Mounting a One-inch (25 mm) Block

This photograph shows a 1-inch (25 mm) block being mounted onto the mounting block itself.

NoteEmerson recommends that you tighten all vertical mounting block cap screws to 50 in-lbs (without lubrication).

2-47Using Additional Mounting Blocks

Page 68: 2130 Laser Alignment

Adding a 2-inch (51 mm) Block

This is a picture of a 2-inch (51 mm) block being attached on top of the 1-inch (25 mm) block (the blocks can be stacked in either order).

2-48 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 69: 2130 Laser Alignment

7

This shows the complete 3-inch (76 mm) extension setup. The following table lists which blocks are to be used for the various vertical extension ranges.

For Vertical Extension Length (inches)

Use These Block(s)(inches)

0 0

1 1

2 2

3 1, 2

2-49Using Additional Mounting Blocks

Page 70: 2130 Laser Alignment

Mounting One Bracket on a Coupling

If at all possible, Emerson recommends that you mount the brackets on the shafts. However, this is not always possible. Occasionally, you may have to mount the bracket on a coupling.

This view shows the B821007 carbon steel mounting brackets being mounted to the shaft on one side and the coupling on the other. In order to do this, you may have to use a vertical extension block(s). In the example shown above, a 1-inch (25 mm) extension block is being used on the right side; no block is used on the left (coupling) side.

2-50 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 71: 2130 Laser Alignment

Mounting on Shafts (or Couplings) > 8-inch (203 mm) Diameter

Although the mounting base itself can be used on shaft diameters up to 26 inches (660 mm), additional section(s) of chain must be used for applications greater than 8 inches (203 mm) in diameter. Emerson sells extension lengths in two-feet chain increments for the B821007 carbon steel mounting bracket (part number D22773) and the A800052 soft-mount (non-rotational) mounting bracket (part number A832001). In addition to the chain itself, extension kits include a clevis pin and a hair pin, which are used to connect the sections of chain together.

Refer to the following table to determine chains needed with various shaft diame-ters.

For Shaft Diameters Inches (mm)

Use These Chain Lengths

Less than 8 (203) Standard Chain Length

8 - 15 1/2(203 – 394)

Standard Chain Length + 1 Optional Length

15 1/2 – 23(394 – 584)

Standard Chain Length +2 Optional Lengths

23 – 26(584 – 660)

Standard Chain Length +3 Optional Lengths

2-51Using Additional Mounting Blocks

Page 72: 2130 Laser Alignment

Using Alternative Mounting Brackets

Attaching the A800052 Soft-Mount (Non-Rotational) Mounting BaseThe A800052 soft mount bracket was developed for machines with shafts or rotors that are too large and heavy or difficult to turn like cement kilns, rock crushers, gearboxes and hammer mills. This bracket is typically used for uncoupled align-ments where either the Manual Sweep or Dual Pass methods are being used. It has eight shielded ball bearings mounted at the base of the bracket so that the bracket actually rolls around the shaft.

Nylon nuts that come in the package can be added to the chain to allow it to easily slide over the shaft while providing a stable mounting configuration. If necessary, install the nylon nuts through slots in the chain using the 6-32 x 1/2 inch panhead screw (provided) so that they are evenly spaced.

8

2-52 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 73: 2130 Laser Alignment

Before using, inspect the soft mount base to ensure that all eight ball bearings are tight and free of play. Screw the mounting posts into each hole in the mounting base and tighten with the supplied tightener (Phillips screwdriver) or with a 1/8 inch Allen wrench (not supplied with kit). Select the chain tightener of choice (refer to “Attaching the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base” on page 2-19 for more information). The hex nut mechanism provides a more stable, versatile mounting while the knurled nut is more convenient. The chain assembly should be slipped into the mounting base so that the nylon nuts rest against the surface of the shaft (or coupling). Hold the chain out away from the base and slip the cylinder into its cradle. To ensure maximum tightening range, each nut should be flush with the end of the tightening bolt.

Place the base on the shaft (or coupling); a link of chain is slipped into the T-slot to secure the base to the shaft. The soft-mount base does not have a chain pickup like the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base. After slipping a chain link into the T-slot, tighten the bolt at the end of the chain. Each mounting base can be installed on either end and the chain bolts placed on either side of the shaft. Take up any slack in the chain using the chain clip (if necessary) and mount the laser fixtures to the posts as described in the section “Attaching the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base” on page 2-19. The following photographs show the base mounted to a shaft. Grasping the bracket (not the laser fixtures) rotate the soft-mount base around the shaft (or coupling).

Caution!Grasping the laser fixtures could result in less accurate, unrepeatable data. This is especially important when using the Dual Pass method where the data is auto-matically acquired as one fixture passes by the other.

Caution!Coupling run-out will severely affect the accuracy of the soft mount brackets. Coupling run-out should be measured and subtracted from the reading during use.

2-53Using Alternative Mounting Brackets

Page 74: 2130 Laser Alignment

Caution!To ensure measurement accuracy, the contact surfaces of the shaft (or coupling) must be free of dirt, grease, oil, etc. If cleaning is needed, Emerson recommends that you use a solvent-base cleaner. Shaft keys should be avoided to reduce errors in accuracy.

9

2-54 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 75: 2130 Laser Alignment

Attaching the A8AA54 Narrow Mounting BaseThe A8AA54, 1/2 inch (13mm) wide, narrow bracket was developed for small machines with shaft diameters of 4 - 1/2 inches (114 mm) and below, where the shaft can be rotated freely. Top and bottom v-shaped bars clamp snugly around the shaft. All is held in place by any one of three fasteners: wing nuts for easy tightening, hexagonal nuts for easy tightening in close quarters or a 1/2 inch (13mm) cou-pling nut for especially tight spaces. The bolts are hinged and can swing freely. A cotter pin can be inserted into the bracket to prevent the bolt from swinging.

10

Place the top v-shaped bar section (base) of the bracket on the shaft and the bottom v-shaped bar section of the bracket on the shaft (on the opposite side of the shaft from where the top v-shaped bar section has been placed) to secure the bracket to the shaft. Ensure that the bolts are seated in the outer most slots of the bottom section. When the top and bottom v-shaped bar bracket sections and bolts are in place, tighten the nut at the end of the bolt to clamp the bracket to the shaft.

2-55Using Alternative Mounting Brackets

Page 76: 2130 Laser Alignment

Screw the mounting posts into each hole in the mounting base and tighten with the supplied tightener (Phillips screwdriver) or with a 1/8 inch Allen wrench (not supplied with kit). Mount the laser fixtures to the posts as described in “Attaching the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base” on page 2-19. The photograph shows the base mounted to a shaft.

11

NoteExtension blocks are not available for this bracket.

2-56 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 77: 2130 Laser Alignment

Attaching the A8AA55 Quick Mount Narrow Mounting BaseThe A8AA55, 1/2 inch (13mm) wide quick mount narrow bracket is a chain type bracket for optimal stability in tight spaces on a wide range of shaft sizes, where the shaft can be rotated freely. The chain assembly should be slipped into the mounting base. Hold the chain out away from the base and slip the cylinder into its cradle. To ensure maximum tightening range, each nut should be flush with the end of the tightening bolt.

12

Place the base on the shaft (or coupling) and a link of chain is slipped onto the pin located on the opposite side of the bracket to secure the base to the shaft. After slip-ping a chain link onto the pin, tighten the bolt at the end of the chain. The bracket is held in place by a 1/2 inch (13mm) coupling nut for especially tight spaces. Each mounting base can be installed on either end and the chain bolts placed on either side of the shaft. Take up any slack in the chain using the hairpin chain clip (if nec-essary).

2-57Using Alternative Mounting Brackets

Page 78: 2130 Laser Alignment

Screw the mounting posts into each hole in the mounting base and tighten with the supplied tightener (Phillips screwdriver) or with a 1/8 inch Allen wrench (not supplied with kit). Mount the laser fixtures to the posts as described in “Attaching the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base” on page 2-19. Once the posts are in place, mount the laser fixtures to the posts. The photograph shows the base mounted to a shaft.

13

NoteExtension chains and blocks are not available for this bracket.

2-58 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 79: 2130 Laser Alignment

Attaching the A800056 Magnetic Mounting BaseThe A800056 9/16 inches (14 mm) thick magnetic bracket was developed to mount on the side of couplings made of ferromagnetic material. Recommended minimum coupling diameter is 3-4 inches (75-100 mm), where the shaft can be rotated freely. Each bracket consists of a light-weight delron housing containing seven, powerful rare-earth magnets. The bracket lip overhangs the coupling rim to provide extra stability. With this accessory it is possible to attach the alignment fix-tures within seconds of tagging out a machine for so-called "hot alignment" checks.

14

2-59Using Alternative Mounting Brackets

Page 80: 2130 Laser Alignment

Screw the mounting posts into each hole in the mounting base and tighten with the supplied tightener (Phillips screwdriver) or with a 1/8 inch Allen wrench (not supplied with kit). Mount the laser fixtures to the posts as described in “Attaching the B821007 Carbon Steel Mounting Base” on page 2-19. Attach the base to the inside or outside of the coupling, depending on the coupling design and whether or not you are performing a coupled or uncoupled alignment. The photograph illustrates the base attached to the outside of a coupling.

15

2-60 Setting Up and Using Laser Alignment Fixtures

Page 81: 2130 Laser Alignment

Chapter 3

Horizontal Alignment

The horizontal alignment feature of the Advanced and Basic Laser Align applica-tions is used to collect and display alignment data for machines in which the machine moves are accomplished at the machine feet.

Help

Depending on where you are within the program, an alignment helper may be available at the bottom of the screen to provide you with a brief explanation of the highlighted step or screen. In addition to the alignment helper, the functionality of any soft key is available. This is accessed by pressing the 2130 analyzer Help key once, and then pressing the soft key for which help is desired. Pressing the Help key twice returns a help message for the active program screen. If further help is required, refer to the appropriate section(s) in this manual.

Basic Alignment Steps

Three basic steps are required to complete an alignment job.

1. Define the alignment job• Setup the job parameters.

• Enter machine dimensions.

2. Acquire alignment data• Acquire alignment data to determine the alignment condition of the

machine.

3. Review alignment results• Review machine moves.

• Move the machine, if necessary.

3-1

Page 82: 2130 Laser Alignment

Advanced and Basic Laser Align Applications

The laser alignment program is available as an advanced laser align program (which includes the ability to perform Basic jobs), and as a basic laser align pro-gram (which can only perform basic alignment jobs).

Advanced Laser Align

If the Advanced Laser Align application is loaded in a 2130 analyzer, the program can be launched from the 2130 analyzer’s Home screen by pressing the Adv Laser Align soft key. When the advanced application is selected, you will have access to the full functionality described throughout this manual. The ability to perform basic laser align jobs is included in this program.

Basic Laser Align

If the Basic Laser Align application is loaded in a 2130 analyzer, the program can be launched by pressing the Basic Laser Align soft key on the 2130 analyzer home page. When the basic application is selected, you will have access to a subset of the functionality described throughout this manual. Refer to the Basic Mode section on page 3-12 for a detailed description of the functionality available in the Basic Laser Align application.

3-2 Horizontal Alignment

Page 83: 2130 Laser Alignment

Main Screen

The main Laser Align Application screen (sometimes referred to as the Main Menu) allows you to monitor progress throughout the alignment job. When a hor-izontal alignment job is active, the Main screen displays as illustrated below.

Laser Align Application Main screen at job start

The application defaults to a predefined setup when a new job is created. The type of job, Job ID, Equipment ID, alignment method, number of machine moves, and number of notes attached to the job are displayed in the upper portion of the main screen.

NoteUnless otherwise noted, any defaults listed are displayed only at first. Once a field is modified from the default, the program uses the latest entry for that field.

3-3Main Screen

Page 84: 2130 Laser Alignment

The steps required to perform an alignment are displayed in the center portion of the main screen. The 2130 Laser Align program leads you through each step of a routine alignment procedure starting with the Enter Dimensions selection at the Main screen. Once an alignment job has started the next uncompleted step in the recommended procedure is highlighted.

An [X] signifies a completed step. As you complete steps, the next recommended step is highlighted. Initially, the Move Machine step is displayed, but grayed out until you’ve completed first two required steps which are critical to the alignment jobs.

Up and Down Arrow keysUse the Up and Down Arrow keys to highlight each feature. If you select an inactive step, a popup message reminds you that the selected step is inactive due to missing information.

3-4 Horizontal Alignment

Page 85: 2130 Laser Alignment

Three Step Alignment

To simulate the basic steps required to complete a horizontal alignment job, the 2130 Laser Align main screen is set up to allow an alignment job to be performed using the following three steps:

1. enter dimensions,• enter machine dimensions

• if thermal growth is enabled, enter thermal growth information; otherwise, this step is skipped

2. sweep laser heads,• if foot pre-check is enabled, perform Soft Foot or FDI check; otherwise, this

step is skipped

• acquire alignment data to determine the alignment condition of the machine

3. move machine• review vertical moves

• review horizontal moves

• perform a live move (optional) and move the machine.

3-5Three Step Alignment

Page 86: 2130 Laser Alignment

Main Screen Function Keys

Enter Dimensions Use the Enter Dimensions key to advance to the Edit Dimensions screen where the dimensions for the machine being aligned can be entered. This is the first step of the three-key operation used in performing an alignment job. If thermal growth is enabled, thermal growth information can also be entered from under this step. Refer to the Enter Dimensions section on page 3-45 for more information.

Sweep Laser Heads Use the Sweep Laser Heads key to advance to the data acquisition screen for the alignment method defined for the job. This is the second step of the three-key operation used in performing an alignment job. From this screen alignment data needed to determine the alignment condition of the machine is acquired. If foot pre-check is enabled, a Soft Foot or FDI check can also be performed from under this step. Refer to the Sweep Laser Heads section on page 3-75 for more informa-tion.

Move Machine Use the Move Machine key to advance to the Vertical Move screen where the machine moves and alignment condition for the vertical direction can be reviewed. This is the third step of the three-key operation used in performing an alignment job. After the Vertical Move screen, the program advances to the Horizontal Move screen where the machine moves and alignment condition for the horizontal direction can be reviewed. If an alignment correction is necessary that requires a live move, this can also be done from under this step. Refer to the Move Machine section on page 3-129 for more information.

NoteThe Enter key will perform the same function as the soft key for the highlighted program step. In addition, the Enter key can be used to advance you through an alignment job from beginning-to-end using the job parameters and flow setup on the Alt Main screen.

3-6 Horizontal Alignment

Page 87: 2130 Laser Alignment

Alt Main Screen

The Alt Main screen (also known as the Main Menu Alt2 screen) allows you to setup alignment job parameters and job flow. The Alt Main screen is reached by pressing the Alt key on the Main screen.

Laser Align Application Alt Main (Advanced Mode)

3-7Alt Main Screen

Page 88: 2130 Laser Alignment

Alt Main Screen Function Keys

Notes Use the Notes key to advance to the Notes screens where notes can be assigned to the current job. In addition to the predefined notes, user defined notes can also be created and assigned to the current job from under this option. Refer to the Notes section on page 3-180 for more information.

Job Mode Use the Job Mode key to toggle the mode of the job between Advanced and Basic. When the job is set to Advanced Mode, then you have all the laser alignment func-tionality described in this document. When the job is set to Basic Mode, then you have a subset of the functionality defined in this document. Refer to the Basic Mode section on page 3-12 for a detailed description of the functionality available in the Basic Mode.

Before switching modes, a warning message will be displayed asking you if this is truly the operation to be performed. If you answer yes, then any data stored on the job or any settings other than the defaults will be cleared and you will remain at the Alt Main screen. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted and you will remain at the Alt Main screen.

Machine Config Use the Machine Config key to advance to the Machine Configuration screen where the machine components for the job can be defined. Refer to the Machine Configuration section on page 3-17 for more information.

Laser Align Method Use the Laser Align Method key to define the alignment method for the job. Refer to the Laser Align Method section on page 3-19 for more information.

Tolerance Type Use the Tolerance Type key to define the alignment tolerance type for the job. Refer to the Tolerance Type section on page 3-22 for more information.

Exit Laser Align Use the Exit Laser Align key to exit the Laser Alignment program and advance to the 2130 analyzer’s Home screen.

3-8 Horizontal Alignment

Page 89: 2130 Laser Alignment

Laser Config Use the Laser Config key to advance to the Laser Configuration screen where the laser head and analyzer addresses can be reviewed and set, and the Laser Head A and B locations can be set. Refer to the Laser Configuration section on page 3-23 for more information.

Job Manager Use the Job Manager key to advance to the Job Manager screens where a new job can be created from scratch using default job setups, a new job can be created using the job setup from an existing job, selected alignment jobs can be deleted from the analyzer, and jobs can be transferred to and from the PC. Refer to the Job Manager section on page 3-34 for more information.

Job Flow Use the Job Flow key to define certain job flow parameters for the job. These parameters consist of entering thermal growth information, performing a foot pre-check, defining live move options, enabling a live move audible tone and flashing LED option, and reviewing and averaging multiple acquisitions together. Refer to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more information.

Print JobThe Print Job key prints a summary report of the current job to the Virtual Printer, if the Virtual Printer is enabled under the General Setup screen of the System Firm-ware. A summary report includes job information, notes, soft foot data, and reading set data (machine feet moves and Angle/Offset data). The report includes only the first and last reading sets that were acquired. The summary report will be similar to the report displayed on page 3-10.

3-9Alt Main Screen Function Keys

Page 90: 2130 Laser Alignment

3-10 Horizontal Alignment

Page 91: 2130 Laser Alignment

Job Reset

The Job Reset key allows the operator to “Clear Job Data,” “Load Default Values,” or “Load Default Tolerances.”

Clear Job DataUse the Clear Job Data function to clear all stored data and notes from the active job. Before any data is cleared, a warning message will be displayed asking the oper-ator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the data stored on the job will be cleared and the operator is taken back to the Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and you will return to the Alt Main screen.

Load Default ValuesUse the Load Default Values function to load job default parameters. Before any defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the operator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the job defaults are loaded and all job data is cleared and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

Load Default TolerancesUse the Load Default Tolerances function to load default alignment tolerances. Before any defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the operator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the default alignment tolerances are loaded and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

3-11Alt Main Screen Function Keys

Page 92: 2130 Laser Alignment

Basic Mode

When running the Basic Laser Align application in the 2130 analyzer, or when the Job Mode in the Advanced Laser Align application is set to Basic, the functionality described throughout this manual will be limited to the subset described in this sec-tion.

Laser Align Application Alt Main (Basic Mode)

Except for differences in the alignment job parameters available under the Alt Main screen, the procedure for performing a basic alignment is exactly as it is for an advanced alignment. The Alt Main screen is reached by pressing the Alt key on the Main screen.

3-12 Horizontal Alignment

Page 93: 2130 Laser Alignment

Basic Mode Function Keys

Notes This option functions exactly the same as is does for Advanced Horizontal jobs. Refer to the Notes section on page 3-180 for more information.

Job Mode When a 2130 analyzer is running the Advanced Laser Align application, the Job Mode soft key functions as described in the section “Job Mode ” on page 3-8. From Job Mode, the user can configure the active job to be run in the “Basic Mode”.

When running the Basic Laser Align application in a 2130 analyzer, the only mode of the laser alignment program which is available is the Basic mode, so the Job Mode soft key is disabled.

Machine Config Machine component names can not be changed in basic mode; therefore, the option to do so is not available. All basic horizontal jobs use “Mach A” as the left machine component and “Mach B” as the right machine component.

Laser Align Method Use the Laser Align Method key to toggle the alignment method between the only two options available in Basic mode: Auto Sweep (default) and Manual 4 Point. Refer to the Acquiring Alignment Data section on page 3-82 for more information about these two methods. In Basic mode:

• When Auto Sweep is selected, the Mode option can not be changed; there-fore, it is not available. All basic horizontal jobs use the Standard Mode.

• When Manual 4 Point is selected, the Sample Rate option can not be changed; therefore, it is not available. All basic horizontal jobs use a Sample Rate of 2. Also, the Sample Rate can not be changed from the Laser Head Status screen.

Refer to the Laser Align Method section on page 3-19 for more information about the Mode of operation and Sample Rate.

3-13Basic Mode Function Keys

Page 94: 2130 Laser Alignment

Tolerance Type Use the Tolerance Type key to toggle the alignment tolerance type between the only two options available in Basic mode: Standard (default) and Jackshaft. Refer to the Tolerance Type section on page 3-22 and the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information. In Basic mode:

• When Standard is selected, the Estimate F Dim option can not be changed; therefore, it is not available. All basic horizontal jobs allow the program to estimate the F dimension to be one half of the C dimension.

Exit Laser Align Use the Exit Laser Align key to exit the Laser Alignment program and advance you to the 2130 analyzer’s Home screen.

Laser Config Use the Laser Config key to advance to the Laser Configuration screen where the laser head and analyzer addresses can be reviewed and set. Refer to the Laser Con-figuration section on page 3-23 for more information. In Basic mode:

• The Laser Head A and B locations can not be changed; therefore, the option to do so is not available. For all basic horizontal jobs, Laser Head A must be located on the left machine and Laser Head B must be located on the right machine.

Job Manager Use the job Manager key to advance to the Job Manager screens where a new job can be created from scratch using default job setups, a new job can be created using the job setup from an existing job, selected alignment jobs can be deleted from the analyzer, and jobs can be transferred to and from the PC. Refer to the Job Manager section on page 3-34 for more information. In Basic Laser Align application:

• Jobs can not be transferred to and from the PC; therefore, the option to do so is not available.

• The alignment tolerance table can not be transferred from the PC into the analyzer. All Basic Horizontal jobs created in the Basic Laser Align applica-tion use the CSI default tolerance values available in the analyzer.

• Only Basic Horizontal jobs can be created; therefore, the option to create, other types of jobs (e.g. Advanced Horizontal, Vertical, and Straightness jobs) is not available.

3-14 Horizontal Alignment

Page 95: 2130 Laser Alignment

• If accessing an external memory card, only Basic Horizontal jobs can be viewed and edited; therefore, if the card were to contain any Advanced Hor-izontal jobs they would not be available.

Job Flow Since thermal growth information is the only Job Flow parameter that can be spec-ified, the Job Flow option is not available. In Basic mode:

• If enabled, thermal growth information can only be entered at the feet.

• Only an FDI Foot Pre-Check can be performed, but only from the data acquisition screen.

• Live moves can only be performed in the horizontal direction.

• The live move audible tone and flashing LED option is disabled.

• Results from multiple acquisitions can not be reviewed and averaged together.

Thermal GrowthUse the Thermal Growth key to define whether or not thermal growth informa-tion at the feet is to be entered for the job. When selected, the selection is toggled between being enabled and disabled (default). When this option is enabled, you are able to input the amount of vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. Refer to the Entering Thermal Growth Information section on page 3-56 for more information.

Print JobThe Print Job key prints a summary report of the current job to the Virtual Printer, if the Virtual Printer is enabled under the General Setup screen of the System Firm-ware. A summary report includes job information, notes, soft foot data, and reading set data (machine feet moves and Angle/Offset data). The report includes only the first and last reading sets that were acquired. The summary report will be similar to the report displayed on page 3-10.

3-15Basic Mode Function Keys

Page 96: 2130 Laser Alignment

Job Reset

The Job Reset key allows the operator to “Clear Job Data,” “Load Default Values,” or “Load Default Tolerances.”

Clear Job Data Use the Clear Job Data function to clear all stored data and notes from the active job. Before any data is cleared, a warning message will be displayed asking the oper-ator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the data stored on the job will be cleared and the operator is taken back to the Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and you will return to the Alt Main screen.

Load Defaults Values Use the Load Default Values function to load job default parameters. Before any defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the operator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the job defaults are loaded and all job data is cleared and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

Load Default TolerancesUse the Load Default Tolerances function to load default alignment tolerances. Before any defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the operator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the default alignment tolerances are loaded and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

Since the application cannot communicate with PC (for the Basic Align application running in the 2130 analyzer) the only tolerance values available are the CSI default values.

The Advanced Laser Align application, when configured to run in the Basic Mode, can use User Defined tolerance values because the program can communicate with a PC, and download tolerance tables.

3-16 Horizontal Alignment

Page 97: 2130 Laser Alignment

Machine Configuration

From the Machine Configuration screen you can select the machine components for the current job. The Machine Configuration screen is reached by pressing the Machine Config key on the Alt Main screen.

Machine Configuration Screen

When this option is first selected, the machine type defined for the left machine will be highlighted by a red box around the machine type by default. The default machine types for the left and right machines are “Mach A” and “Mach B”.

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keysUse Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select between each of the machine types.

3-17Basic Mode Function Keys

Page 98: 2130 Laser Alignment

When “Other” is selected as the machine type you can enter a machine name (up to 7 characters in length). The following machine types can be defined for the job:

Machine Types

Machine Configuration Function Keys

Select Left Machine Use the Select Left Machine key to set the left machine component to the machine type highlighted by the red box.

Select Right MachineUse the Select Right Machine key to set the right machine component to the machine type highlighted by the red box.

3-18 Horizontal Alignment

Page 99: 2130 Laser Alignment

Laser Align Method

From the Laser Align (Alignment) Method subwindow you can select the align-ment method for the current job. The Laser Align (Alignment) Method sub-window is reached by pressing the Laser Align Method key on the Alt Main screen.

Alignment Method Subwindow

3-19Basic Mode Function Keys

Page 100: 2130 Laser Alignment

Laser Align (Alignment) Method Function Keys

MethodUse the Method key to select the alignment method. The choices are: Auto Sweep (default), Dual Pass, Manual Sweep, Auto 4 Point, and Manual 4 Point. Refer to the Acquiring Alignment Data section on page 3-82 for more information.

ModeUse the Mode key, if the alignment method is Auto Sweep or Manual, to define the mode of operation for the alignment method defined. When selected, the mode is toggled between Standard (default) and Averaging.

The Standard mode of operation is the mode that is most often used during hori-zontal alignments. In this mode of operation, once the direction of rotation is defined by the laser heads, any previous data stored is overwritten by any new data acquired at the same angular position.

The Averaging mode of operation is intended to allow multiple sampling of data in order to reduce the noise in the data by averaging all of the acquired values. In this mode of operation, once the direction of rotation is defined by the laser heads, any previous data stored is averaged with any new data acquired at the same angular position if the laser head has been moved at least 20° in the reverse direction or a full 360° sweep is performed.

Target WindowUse the Target Window key, if the alignment method is Dual Pass, to set the Target Window. The choices are: 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, or 100% (default). The Target Window determines the size of the valid data window around the vertical centerline of the other laser head's Position Sensing Detector (PSD) in which data is to be acquired as the laser beam passes across the PSD. No data is acquired as the laser beam passes across the PSD outside of the valid data window. Typically a Target Window of 100% is sufficient, but for increased accuracy and repeatability you may want to decrease the size of the Target Window to ensure that data is being acquired as close to the PSD's vertical centerline as possible.

3-20 Horizontal Alignment

Page 101: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteIf a lower percentage (smaller valid window) is selected, a slower rota-tional speed may be required especially with a smaller PSD (e.g. with the 10x10mm PSD on the 8215). For example, a 10% Target Window would define a 2mm wide window on an 8225 and a 1mm wide window on an 8215 centered around the PSD's vertical center-line in which data will be acquired as the laser beam passes across the window.

Sample RateUse the Sample Rate key, if the alignment method is Manual, Auto 4 Point, or Manual 4 Point, to set the number of samples (in the range 1 to 25) to be averaged together to generate a single reading. Two samples (default) are typically sufficient, but for example, if too much background vibration is present you may want to increase the number of samples to 25. This option can also be changed after the job has been created from the Laser Head Status screen.

3-21Laser Align (Alignment) Method Function Keys

Page 102: 2130 Laser Alignment

Tolerance Type

From the Tolerance Type subwindow you can select the tolerance type for the cur-rent job. The Tolerance Type subwindow is reached by pressing the Tolerance Type key on the Alt Main screen.

Tolerance Type Subwindow

Tolerance Type Function Keys

Tolerance TypeUse the Tolerance Type key to define the tolerance type for the job. When selected, the selection is toggled between Standard (default) and Jackshaft.

Standard tolerances are the combination of offset and angle. This tolerance type is a direct indication of the alignment condition. Optimum alignment occurs when offset and angle are zero.

3-22 Horizontal Alignment

Page 103: 2130 Laser Alignment

Jackshaft tolerances are used when the laser heads are mounted 20 or more inches apart. In these cases, Standard Tolerances are the less practical to use. This method measures the two angles between the shafts. Optimum alignment occurs when the two angles are zero.

Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

Estimate F Dim Use the Estimate F Dim key if the Tolerance Type is Standard in order to define whether the F dimension is to be estimated. When selected, it is toggled between being enabled and disabled (default). When enabled, the program will estimate the F dimension to be one half of the C dimension. If the Tolerance Type is Jack-shaft, the F dimension is not required.

Laser Configuration

From the Laser Configuration screen you can configure the location for each of the laser heads during the alignment, check and set the heads and analyzer address, and check the operational status of the heads. The Laser Configuration screen is reached by pressing the Laser Config key on the Alt Main screen.

Laser Configuration Screen

3-23Laser Align (Alignment) Method Function Keys

Page 104: 2130 Laser Alignment

The location of each head is based on how the machines are viewed. It does not matter which head is put on which machine; however, the analyzer must know each head’s location.

Caution!Selecting the proper configuration for the laser heads is extremely important! If the setting is wrong, all of the machine move calculations will be incorrect.

Although both Head A and Head B of the older version of Model 8215/8225 laser heads have gray front panels with black grid lines, A and B are marked on the front panel of the laser head. The newer version of the Model 8215/8225 laser heads have A and B marked on the front panel, and in addition can be distinguished by the color of the front panels. Head A has a gray front panel with white grid lines while Head B has a blue front panel, also with white grid lines.

NoteA routine in the program is used to sense whether the Model 8215 or the Model 8225 laser heads are being used.

Laser Configuration Function Keys

Change Laser ConfigUse the Change Laser Config key to toggle configuration of the laser heads. The display must be set to match the actual location for each of the laser heads based on how the machines are to be viewed during the alignment.

Laser Address SelectionUse the Laser Address Selection key to check and set the head and analyzer addresses.

Check LasersUse the Check Lasers key to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-108 for more information.

3-24 Horizontal Alignment

Page 105: 2130 Laser Alignment

Resend DataUse the Resend Data key to resend data from the laser heads. This key is active when the alignment method is set to Auto Sweep or Dual Pass on the Alt Laser Con-figuration screen. This option is useful if for some reason the data transfer from the heads to the analyzer was aborted before completion. Once retrieval is complete, a check of the data will be made. Once this is complete, you will be advanced to the main screen where the Move Machine program step will be highlighted.

NoteData stored in the laser heads clears when they are turned off or when initialized.

3-25Laser Align (Alignment) Method Function Keys

Page 106: 2130 Laser Alignment

Laser Address Selection

From the Current Addresses screen you can review, read, and set the laser head (Models 821500 and 822500 only) and the analyzer addresses. The Current Addresses screen is reached by pressing the Laser Address Selection key on the Laser Configuration screen.

Current Addresses Screen

From this screen only the addresses setup in the analyzer and not the addresses setup in the laser heads themselves are displayed. To review the actual address setup in Head A, with Head A turned on and Head B turned off, select Read Head A Address. To review the actual address setup in Head B, with Head B turned on and Head A turned off, select Read Head B Address.

3-26 Horizontal Alignment

Page 107: 2130 Laser Alignment

Laser addressing is necessary when using either direct connect or RF communica-tions. If one laser system (a system consists of a pair of laser heads and an analyzer) using RF communication is operating in close proximity to another laser system using RF communication, this option prevents the two from interfering with each other. In this situation, all but one of the laser systems could use direct connect cables to communicate instead of RF communication, or the addresses of each laser system can be changed so that each laser system has a different address than the other.

For example, one laser system can have the address of its Head A set to 1, Head B to 2, and analyzer to 11 while the other laser system can have the address of its Head A set to 3, Head B to 4, and analyzer to 12. A maximum of 5 laser systems commu-nicating RF can be configured to operate using different addresses.

The definition of “operating in close proximity” will vary from one environment to another. For example, in one plant any laser system operating within 50 feet (15m) of each other could have RF interference due to the other laser system while in another plant any laser system operating within 200 feet (61m) of each other could have RF interference due to the other laser system.

Refer to Communication Between the Fixtures and Analyzer on page 2-32 for more information.

3-27Laser Address Selection

Page 108: 2130 Laser Alignment

Read Head A Address keyUse the Read Head A Address key to read and set the address in Head A. To read and set the laser head addresses the direct connect cable must be attached to each of the laser heads and the analyzer first before this option is selected. After the direct connect cable is attached, turn Head A on and leave Head B turned off.

Received Address Subwindow

When the Received Address subwindow is displayed the actual address setup in Head A also displays. If the address is not correct or you wish to change it, type in the new address from 1 (default) to 10, then press the Enter key to accept the change and return to the Current Addresses screen. The new address must be dif-ferent than the Head B address. If the address is correct, press Enter to return to the Current Addresses screen.

Caution!When connecting any device to the RS232 serial port located on the top panel of the analyzer, the analyzer must be turned off.

3-28 Horizontal Alignment

Page 109: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteIf you enter a number outside the range of 1 to 10 or try to enter two addresses which are the same, you will get a warning telling you of the error. Should this happen, press the Enter key to continue and repeat the procedure.

Read Head B Address keyUse the Read Head B Address key to read and set the address in Head B. The pro-cedure for Head B is the same as described above for Head A, except in this case Head B is turned on and Head A is turned off. If a new address is entered it must be different than the Head A address.

Set Analyzer Address keyUse the Set Analyzer Address key to read and set the address in the analyzer. The analyzer address can be set from 11 (default) to 15.

NoteIf you enter a number outside the range of 11 to 15 you will get a warning telling you of the error. If this occurs, press the Enter key to continue and repeat the procedure.

3-29Laser Address Selection

Page 110: 2130 Laser Alignment

Check Lasers

From the Laser Head Status screen you can check the operational status of the heads and change the sample rate. The Laser Head Status screen is reached by pressing the Check Lasers key on the Laser Configuration screen.

Laser Head Status Screen (show bar graphs)

3-30 Horizontal Alignment

Page 111: 2130 Laser Alignment

Laser Head Status Screen (show numbers)

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

3-31Laser Address Selection

Page 112: 2130 Laser Alignment

Laser Head Status Function Keys

Show NumbersUse the Show Numbers key to replace the Battery, Laser, and Sensor bar graphs with numbers as illustrated above in “Laser Head Status Screen (show numbers)” on page 3-31.

Show Bar Graphs Use the Show Bar Graphs key to replace the Battery, Laser, and Sensor numbers with bar graphs as illustrated above in “Laser Head Status Screen (show bar graphs)” on page 3-30.

Increase Sample Rate Use the Increase Sample Rate key to increase the sample rate of the laser heads.

When acquiring alignment data under the Sweep Laser Heads step - if the align-ment method is Manual, Auto 4 Point, or Manual 4 Point, this key is used to set the number of samples (in the range 1 to 25) to be averaged together to generate a single reading when acquiring alignment data. Two samples (default) are typically sufficient, but if too much background vibration is present, for example, you may want to increase the number of samples to 25. This option can also be changed from the Alignment Method subwindow.

When acquiring alignment data under the Sweep Laser Heads step, if the align-ment method is Auto Sweep or Dual Pass, the sample rate can not be changed.

Decrease Sample Rate Use the Increase Sample Rate key similarly as you would the Increase Sample Rate key except this key is used to decrease the sample rate of the laser heads.

Hide Laser Angle Use the Hide Laser Angle key to hide the laser angle. This key is active when the alignment method is set to Manual 4 Point on the Alt Laser Head Status screen. This option can also be changed after the job has been created from the Alt screen of the Manual 4 Point acquisition and Live Move options.

This option is necessary when performing alignments on vertically mounted machinery where the movement is at the feet instead of a flange and on machinery where the clock positions relative to vertical and horizontal base movements of the machine are nonstandard.

3-32 Horizontal Alignment

Page 113: 2130 Laser Alignment

Show Laser AngleUse the Show Laser Angle key similarly as you would the Hide Laser Angle key except this key is used to show the laser angle if it is hidden.

3-33Laser Address Selection

Page 114: 2130 Laser Alignment

Job Manager

From the Job Manager screen you can perform job related tasks (e.g. creating, editing, deleting, transferring, copying, and activating jobs). In addition to jobs, alignment tolerances can also be transferred from the PC to the analyzer. The Job Manager screen is reached by pressing the Job Manager key on the Alt Main screen.

Job Manager Screen

The Job ID and Equipment Description defined for the highlighted job displays on the upper section of the screen. The active location displays just below the job infor-mation. The list of jobs stored on the active location displays on the lower section of the screen.

When this screen displays, the active job is highlighted. If no jobs are stored on the active location, the message “No Jobs Found” displays.

3-34 Horizontal Alignment

Page 115: 2130 Laser Alignment

Job Manager Function Keys

Create New Job Use the Create New Job key to create a new default horizontal job and advance you to the Edit Job screen. Refer to the Edit Job Setup section on page 3-38 for more information.

Change Location Use the Change Location key to change the memory location where jobs are stored. This key is only active if at least one external memory card is installed in the analyzer.

Edit This Job Use the Edit This Job key to advance to the Edit Job screen. Jobs may be edited from here. If the highlighted job is not the active job, then it is made the active job before advancing to the Edit Job screen. Refer to the Edit Job Setup section on page 3-38 for more information.

Select/Unselect Use the Select/Unselect key to choose the highlighted job (place a check mark just to the left of the job name). If the job has already been selected, clear the check-mark to remove the job. (This operation does not delete the job).

Select/Unselect All Use the Select/Unselect All key to select all jobs (place a check mark just to the left of all job names) and remove all jobs(clear all check marks). (This operation does not delete the job).

Delete Selected JobsUse the Delete Selected Jobs key to delete the selected jobs. Before any job is deleted, a warning message displays asking if this is the operation you desire to per-form. If you answer yes, then the selected jobs will be deleted. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted. This key is only active when at least one job has been selected.

3-35Laser Address Selection

Page 116: 2130 Laser Alignment

Caution!Use extreme caution with the delete jobs option when the analyzer contains important alignment data. Once you answer yes to the warning message all data on the selected jobs will be lost.

NoteAlignment jobs can also be deleted from under the File Utility option. Alignment jobs have a .LJB file extension. Refer to the File Utility sec-tion of the Model 2130 Machinery Analyzer User’s Guide (P/N 97017) for more information.

Connect for Transfer Use the Connect for Transfer key to transfer jobs to and from the PC. In addition to jobs, alignment tolerances can also be transferred from the PC to the analyzer. Refer to the Transferring Alignment Job Data and Tolerances section on page 3-184 for more information.

In the Basic Laser Align program, jobs can not be transferred to and from the PC; therefore this option is not available.

Copy Job Use the Copy Job key to create a copy of the highlighted job. Before the job is copied, you are given the choice of copying the job with all acquired data or without the acquired data. The highlighted job will be copied using the next available job number.

Activate Job Use the Activate job key to activate the highlighted job and advance to the Main screen. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

NoteWhen the Laser Align program is activated - if the last active job can not be located, a message displays instructing the user to proceed to Job Manager and either select another job or create a new job.

3-36 Horizontal Alignment

Page 117: 2130 Laser Alignment

Job Up and Down Arrows Use the Job Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of jobs one at a time. The highlighted job will toggle from top to bottom and vise versa with these keys. The keys are only active when more than one job is listed.

Page Up and Down Arrows Use the Page Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of jobs one page at a time. These keys are only active when more than one page of jobs is listed.

3-37Laser Address Selection

Page 118: 2130 Laser Alignment

Edit Job Setup

Press the Edit This Job soft key to advance to the Edit Job Setup screen where the job parameters used for job identification and storage may be edited. The Edit Job Setup screen is reached by pressing the Edit This Job key on the Job Manager screen.

Edit Job Setup Screen

3-38 Horizontal Alignment

Page 119: 2130 Laser Alignment

Edit Job Setup Function Keys

Edit Job ID Use the Edit Job ID key to edit the Job ID. This option provides for the creation of a unique ID useful for identifying the job. For example, it could be tied back to the work order number, etc. The Job ID must be a minimum of 1 character and a max-imum of 10 characters. The Job ID can not contain any of the illegal characters: ? * . : / \ | “ < > #.

The Job ID is displayed:

• in the upper section of the main screen (for the active job);

• on the left side of the Job Manager screen (for all jobs listed).

When transferring a job defined in the analyzer to the PC, it will be transferred to UltraMgr as an unassigned job. After the job transfer completes, the job should be assigned to its machine. The Equip ID, Equip Desc, and Area will be modified to match their assignment within UltraMgr.

If no machine or station exists (in the UltraMgr database), they can be created after the job has been transferred. You can then complete the job assignment.

NoteIf the job is defined within UltraMgr, the Equip ID, Equip Descrip-tion, Area, and Coupling cannot be modified within the analyzer.

NoteWhen transferring a job from the analyzer to the PC, if a job with the same date and time exists in the storage location (unassigned or assigned), the job will be stored as a new job if the job number differs. If a job with the same job number, but a different date and time exists in the storage location, the job will be stored as a new job. If a job with the same date and job number exists, then an error will be displayed and the job does not upload.

3-39Laser Address Selection

Page 120: 2130 Laser Alignment

Edit Equip ID Use the Edit Equip ID key to edit the Equipment ID. This option is useful for iden-tifying the equipment being aligned. The Equipment ID is displayed in the upper section of the main screen (for the active job). The Equipment ID can be a max-imum of 10 characters.

Edit Equip Desc Use the Edit Equip Desc key to edit the Equipment Description. This option is useful for adding additional information to identify the equipment being aligned. The Equipment Job Description can be a maximum of 28 characters.

Edit Area Use the Edit Area key to edit the Area Description. This option is useful for identi-fying where the equipment being aligned is located. The Area Description can be a maximum of 32 characters.

Edit Coupling NumberUse the Edit Coupling Number key to edit the Coupling Number. This option is useful if the machinery being aligned has more than one coupling. Each coupling should have a unique number. An example would be a machinery train consisting of a motor, a gearbox, and a compressor. The coupling between the motor and gearbox should be 1 and the coupling between the gearbox and compressor should be 2. The Coupling Number must be in the range 1 (default) to 10.

Set Mode Use the Set Mode key to toggle the alignment mode of the job between horizontal (default), vertical, and straightness. Refer to the appropriate sections for informa-tion about these modes.

The job mode is displayed:

• in the upper section of the main screen (for the active job),

• in the center of the Job Manager screen (for all jobs listed).

If you attempt to change the job mode after the job has been created, a warning messge displays asking if this is the operation to be performed. If accepted, the alignment mode of the job is changed.

• any changes made to the job setup will be cleared,

3-40 Horizontal Alignment

Page 121: 2130 Laser Alignment

• any of the information setup under Edit Job Setup does not clear since this information is common to each of the modes,

• any data stored on the job clears,

• the default setup conditions for the mode specified (except for the informa-tion setup under Edit Job Setup) loads into the job.

If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

In the Basic Laser Align Program, only horizontal alignment jobs can be created; therefore, this option is not available.

Edit User ID Use the Edit User ID key to edit the User ID. This option is useful for identifying who performed the alignment. Normally, it will be the user’s initials. The User ID can be a maximum of 3 characters.

3-41Laser Address Selection

Page 122: 2130 Laser Alignment

Job Flow

From the Job Flow subwindow, select which optional parameters are to be included or excluded as part of the job flow for the current job. These optional parameters include: entering thermal growth inputs, performing a foot pre-check, performing a vertical live move, enabling an audible tone and flashing LED during a live move, and review alignment results and data averaging.

The Job Flow subwindow displays by pressing the Job Flow key on the Alt Main screen.

Job Flow Subwindow

3-42 Horizontal Alignment

Page 123: 2130 Laser Alignment

Job Flow Function Keys

Thermal Growth Use the Thermal Growth key to define the type of Thermal Growth for the current job. The choices are: No Thermal Growth (default), At Feet, At Profile, Gap/Offset, Face/Rim, and Reverse Dial. Refer to the Entering Thermal Growth Infor-mation section on page 3-56 for more information.

NoteAll machine dimensions are required for thermal growth inputs to be taken into account; therefore, if a machine has been configured as a “Fixed” machine this key is not available.

Foot Pre-Check Use the Foot Pre-Check key to define the type of Foot Pre-Check to be performed on the current job. The choices are: No Foot Pre-Check (default), Soft Foot, and Frame Distortion Index. Refer to the Foot Pre-Check section on page 3-76 for more information.

Live Move Use the Live Move key to define whether a live move can be accomplished in the vertical direction. When selected, Live Move toggles between Horizontal Only (default) and Vertical and Horizontal. When Horizontal Only is selected, the Live Move option is not active on the Vertical Move screen. On the Dual Move screen, the live move can only be performed in the horizontal direction. Refer to the Move Machine section on page 3-129 for more information.

Enable Alert Use the Enable Alert key to enable or disable (default) the live move audible tone and flashing LED option during a live move. When the Enable Alert option is enabled, the analyzer LED will flash when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values. Increasing and decreasing flashes indicate when the machine alignment crosses through the acceptable and excellent toler-ance condition thresholds described above. The number of flashes and flash rate will be consistent with the audible tone generated when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values.

3-43Laser Address Selection

Page 124: 2130 Laser Alignment

If the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is enabled and the Enable Alert option is enabled, the audible tone will be generated as described above, but if the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is disabled and the Enable Alert option is enabled, the audible tone will not be generated as described above. In this case only the analyzer LED will flash as described above.

When the Enable Alert option is disabled, the analyzer LED will not flash and an audible tone will not be generated when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values.

Review ResultsUse the Review Results key to enable or disable (default) the Review Results option in the Job Flow. When enabled, you are able to review and average together the results from multiple acquisitions. Refer to the Review Results section on page 3-124 for more information.

3-44 Horizontal Alignment

Page 125: 2130 Laser Alignment

Enter Dimensions

The Enter Dimensions screen allows you to enter the dimensions for the machine being aligned. If thermal growth is enabled, thermal growth information can also be entered from under this step. The Enter Dimensions screen is reached by pressing the Enter Dimensions key on the Main screen.

NoteThis section assumes that the fixtures are set up to the point that the laser heads are mounted.

Enter Dimensions Screen (both machines moveable)

3-45Laser Address Selection

Page 126: 2130 Laser Alignment

Enter Dimensions Screen (right machine fixed)

NoteWhen a machine has been configured as a “Fixed” machine (as shown in the second figure above) the program will not require any dimensions to be entered for that machine. Although dimensions are not required for this machine, without them, no machine moves for that machine can be given.

The machine RPM should be unique for each coupling that is defined for this job. If you have a variable speed machine, enter the highest RPM at which the coupling operates. Also, if a coupling design has shafts operating at different speeds enter the larger of the two. This parameter is used to establish alignment tolerances. Although you are not required to enter the RPM before acquiring data, it is required before any results can be viewed. The range of values that can be entered for the RPM are 1 to 99999 RPM.

3-46 Horizontal Alignment

Page 127: 2130 Laser Alignment

Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered for the A, C, and E dimensions are 0.01 to 3600 inches and 0.254 to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the B, D, and F dimensions are -3600 to 3600 inches and --91440 to 91440 mm.

When entering any of the machine dimensions, they should be measured and extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm) with the exception of dimension C. Dimension C should be measured to the nearest 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.

In addition to the RPM, the C and F dimensions (if using standard tolerances) are required to calculate and view the machine’s alignment condition available in the Move Machine function. If any of these parameters have not been entered, a warning message will be displayed before continuing. The warning message will prompt you to verify that you want to proceed without the required information. If you answer yes, then you will advance to the next step in the procedure. Also, if the C dimension is missing and the Foot Pre-Check option has been enabled, it will be disabled before advancing. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted and you remain at the Enter Dimensions screen.

If only the RPM and C and F dimensions have been entered, then the Quick Spec mode will be activated. In Quick Spec mode only the Angle/Offset data will be available, no machine moves will be calculated, and if either the thermal growth or Review Results options have been enabled they will be disabled. In this case, a warning message displays before continuing. The warning message prompts to verify that proceeding to Quick Spec mode is desired. If you answer yes, then it advances to the next step in the procedure. If you answer no, then the operation aborts and the unit remains at the Enter Dimensions screen.

In addition to the RPM and C and F dimensions, if any of the following dimensions are missing the Quick Spec mode activates. Refer to the Quick Spec section on page 3-53 for more information.

The A, B, C, D, and E dimensions are required to calculate and view the six alter-nate machine move solutions that are available in the Move Machine function.

• A, B and D m • B, D and E • B and D

• A, B and E • A and D • B and E

• A, D and E • A and E

3-47Laser Address Selection

Page 128: 2130 Laser Alignment

If only the RPM and A, B, C, and F dimensions have been entered, then no alter-nate solutions will be available for the right machine. If only the RPM and D, E, C, and F dimensions have been entered, then no alternate solutions will be available for the left machine. In either case, no warning message will be displayed before continuing.

If the A dimension is the only input missing, then no alternate solutions that include the A dimension will be available. If the E dimension is the only input missing, then no alternate solutions that include the E dimension will be available. In either case, a warning message will be displayed before continuing. The warning message will prompt you to verify that this is a single foot machine. If you answer yes, then you will advance to the next step in the procedure. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted and you will remain at the Enter Dimensions screen.

If the B dimension is the only input missing, then no alternate solutions will be avail-able for the left machine. If the D dimension is the only input missing, then no alternate solutions will be available for the right machine. In either case, a warning message will be displayed before continuing. The warning message informs you that the missing dimension is required to calculate machine moves for the left or right machine. The message also prompts you to verify that you want to proceed without the missing dimension. If you answer yes, then you will advance to the next step in the procedure. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted and you will remain at the Enter Dimensions screen.

NoteWhen thermal growth is enabled, all machine dimensions must be entered before advancing to the thermal growth screens. If not, a message displays when you try to advance to the next step in the pro-cedure. If all dimensions have not been entered, thermal growth will be disabled before advancing.

3-48 Horizontal Alignment

Page 129: 2130 Laser Alignment

Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

NoteThe dimensions are the same for both the Model 8215 and the Model 8225 laser heads.

NoteWith large equipment, you may need to drop a plumb bob from the laser head to measure these dimensions accurately.

Dimension Measurement DescriptionMeasure

to the Nearest

A Center of outboard foot to center of inboard foot of the machine on the left.

1/8 inch(3 mm)

B Center of inboard foot on the left machine to the laser head face on the left machine. To enter a measurement for a foot that falls inside the laser face, place a negative sign (–) in front of it.

1/8 inch(3 mm)

C Measure from the inside face of one laser head to the inside face of the other laser head.

1/16 inch(1.5 mm)

D Center of inboard foot on the right machine to the laser head on the right machine. To enter a measurement for a foot that falls inside the laser face, place a negative sign (–) in front of it.

1/8 inch(3 mm)

E Center of outboard foot to center of inboard foot of the machine on the right.

1/8 inch(3 mm)

F From right laser head to center of coupling or, to the location where offset tolerances are measured (this is not required for jackshaft tolerances). To enter a measurement where the center of the coupling falls outside or behind a laser face, place a negative sign (-) in front of the measurement.

1/8 inch(3 mm)

3-49Laser Address Selection

Page 130: 2130 Laser Alignment

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field to modify (highlighted with the red box around it).

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to either the Sweep Laser Heads step or the thermal growth screen(s). If the Thermal Growth option is not enabled once all required dimensions have been entered, the Enter Dimensions step back on the Main screen will be marked completed and the unit advances to the Sweep Laser Heads step. If the Thermal Growth option is enabled, the display advances to the thermal growth screen(s).

3-50 Horizontal Alignment

Page 131: 2130 Laser Alignment

Entering Fractions

With the analyzer units set to English, the decimal “.” and forward slash “/” charac-ters can be used to enter fractional values on numeric entry screens in which these two characters are available. The decimal “.” character is used to separate the integer part from the fractional part of the numerical value.

Entering a fractional value of 5 34---

3-51Laser Address Selection

Page 132: 2130 Laser Alignment

For example, if a fractional value of 5.3/4 is entered (shown in the screen above) it will be converted to 5.75 (shown in the screen below) when either another dimen-sion is selected or the Enter key is pressed to accept the screen and advance to the next step in the procedure.

Factional value of converted to 5.755 34---

3-52 Horizontal Alignment

Page 133: 2130 Laser Alignment

Quick Spec

Quick Spec mode allows you to make a quick check of the alignment condition of a machine with minimal setup and effort. If a machine is found to have unaccept-able alignment, the procedure can be readily converted to a full alignment proce-dure and machine moves calculated. Quick Spec is only available in the Advanced Laser Align program for horizontal jobs.

Quick Spec mode is activated when only the RPM and C and F dimensions have been entered. In addition to the RPM and C and F dimensions, if any of the fol-lowing dimensions are missing, the Quick Spec mode will be activated. Refer to the Enter Dimensions section on page 3-45 for more information.

In this Mode, only tolerance plot information will be available since machine move information can not be calculated without machine dimensions. For this reason, the tolerance plot screens will be displayed immediately after data has been acquired and analyzed. In addition, when the Quick Spec mode is activated, if either the thermal growth or Review Results options have been enabled they will be disabled. In this case, a warning message displays before continuing.

• A, B and D m • B, D and E • B and D

• A, B and E • A and D • B and E

• A, D and E • A and E

3-53Laser Address Selection

Page 134: 2130 Laser Alignment

After viewing the tolerance plot(s), use the Enter key to advance to the next step in the procedure. In the next step, you will be given a choice to consider the align-ment finished, retake data, align the standard machine, or align the C-face machine.

Options available at end of Quick Spec job

If Finished is selected, data remains stored and you advance to the Main screen without checking the Move Machine program step on the Main screen as com-plete.

If Retake Data is selected, data is cleared and you advance to the first screen of the Sweep Laser Heads step. In the Quick Spec mode, no more than one set of data can be stored on the job.

If Align Standard Machine is selected, data remains stored and you advance to the Enter Dimensions screen where the machine dimensions for at least one of the machines has to be entered. Once the required dimensions have been entered use the Enter key to advance to the Move Machine step where the machine moves can be viewed.

3-54 Horizontal Alignment

Page 135: 2130 Laser Alignment

If Align C-face Machine is selected, data remains stored and you advance to the C-face Setup screen where the machine dimensions for the flange location where moves are to be made can be entered. Once the required dimensions have been entered use the Enter key to advance to the C-face Solution screen where the align-ment condition and machine moves can be viewed. Refer to the C-face Alignment section on page 3-175 for more information.

NoteTo perform a C-face alignment, the tolerance type can only be Stan-dard. If the job has a tolerance type of Jackshaft defined, when you select the Align C-face Machine option a message will be displayed. If you answer yes, then the tolerance type will be changed to Standard and you will proceed to the C-face Setup screen. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

3-55Laser Address Selection

Page 136: 2130 Laser Alignment

Entering Thermal Growth Information

Thermal growth can cause a machine alignment to change significantly as machines are started from a “cold” position and run up to operating speed (“hot” position). The Thermal Growth screens allow you to enter the amount of thermal growth both machines experience during operation. The Thermal Growth screens are reached by pressing the Enter key on the Enter Dimensions screen (if thermal growth is enabled on the Alt Main screen). Refer to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more information about enabling the Thermal Growth option. This option is not available when Quick Spec mode is activated. Refer to the Quick Spec section on page 3-53 for more information.

Refer to the Alignment Application Notes section on page A-3 for more informa-tion about thermal growth.

NoteThe larger PSD on the Model 8225 is capable of handling larger amounts of thermal growth than the smaller PSD on the Model 8215.

The Laser Align program allows you to input the amount of thermal growth at the machine feet, or at the machine profile positions (which are then converted to the corresponding movement at the machine feet). It also consists of the following three methods of converting from target thermal growth alignment numbers (usu-ally provided by the Equipment Manufacturer) to estimated machine thermal growth movements at each foot:

• Gap/Offset

• Face/Rim

• Reverse Dial

NoteThe information entered for these conversion methods is only stored with the job as long as it resides in the analyzer. When one of these jobs is reloaded into the analyzer from the PC only the vertical and horizontal thermal growth calculated at each machine foot is stored and recalled with the job when it is activated. In this case, the Thermal Growth method defined for the job is set to Growth at Feet.

3-56 Horizontal Alignment

Page 137: 2130 Laser Alignment

Growth at Feet

If Thermal Growth at Feet has been defined as the thermal growth method for the job, you are able to input the amount of vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot.

Enter Growth at Feet

Growth in the vertical direction is displayed in the upper section of the screen while growth in the horizontal direction is displayed in the lower section of the screen.

The amount of vertical thermal growth that both machines will experience during operation can be expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. Thermal growth values should correspond to the amount each shaft moves in the vertical and horizontal directions directly above each foot. If thermal growth is negligible, either leave it blank or enter zeroes. At least one non-zero value must be entered before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for the vertical direction are -250 to 250 mils or -6.35 to 6.35 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the horizontal direction are -250 to 250 mils or -6.35 to 6.35 mm.

3-57Laser Address Selection

Page 138: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteIf one or both machines actually experience a downward growth during operation, then negative numbers should be used for the ver-tical direction. If one or both machines experience a growth to the right during operation, then negative numbers should be used for the horizontal direction.

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keysUse the Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (highlighted with the red box around it).

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to either the Foot Pre-Check screens or the data acquisition screens. Once all required dimensions have been entered, the Enter Dimensions step back on the Main screen will be marked completed and you will advance to the next step in the procedure.

3-58 Horizontal Alignment

Page 139: 2130 Laser Alignment

Growth at Profile

If Thermal Growth at Profile has been defined as the thermal growth method for the job, you are able to input the amount of vertical and horizontal thermal growth at a location other than at each machine foot. The program uses this information to calculate the vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. This method consists of the following three screens.

Enter Profile Dimensions

The Enter Profile Dimensions screen, allows you to enter the dimensions for the profile locations and their relationship with respect to the machine feet locations as defined in the Enter Dimensions screen. Profile P1 (far right of the screen) is located with respect to the machine configuration as defined for the job. The loca-tion of each profile is displayed as a reference only.

Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. All dimensions must be entered before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for the I dimension are -3600 to 3600 inches or -91440 to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the J, K, and L dimensions are 0.01 to 3600 inches or 0.254 to 91440 mm.

3-59Laser Address Selection

Page 140: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteDimension I is negative, if the location of profile P4 is closer to the coupling than the outboard feet of the left machine.

When entering any of the machine dimensions, they should be measured and extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.

Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-lighted with the red box around it).

Dimension Measurement DescriptionMeasure

to the Nearest

I Profile P4 to the center of outboard foot of the machine on the left.

1/8 inch(3 mm)

J Profile P4 to profile P3. 1/8 inch(3 mm)

K Profile P3 across the coupling to profile P2. 1/8 inch(3 mm)

L Profile P2 to profile P1. 1/8 inch(3 mm)

3-60 Horizontal Alignment

Page 141: 2130 Laser Alignment

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the Enter Growth at Profile screen.

Enter Growth at Profile

The Enter Growth at Profile screen, allows entry of the amount of vertical and hor-izontal thermal growth at a location other than at each machine foot. Growth in the vertical direction displays in the upper section of the screen, while growth in the horizontal direction displays in the lower section of the screen.

The amount of thermal growth that both machines experience during operation can be expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. Thermal growth values should correspond to the amount each shaft moves in the vertical and horizontal directions at each profile location. If thermal growth is negligible, leave it blank or enter zeroes. At least one non-zero value must be entered before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for the vertical direction are -250 to 250 mils or -6.35 to 6.35 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the horizontal direction are -250 to 250 mils or -6.35 to 6.35 mm.

3-61Laser Address Selection

Page 142: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteIf one or both machines actually experience a downward growth during operation, then negative numbers should be used for the ver-tical direction. If one or both machines experience a growth to the right during operation, then negative numbers should be used for the horizontal direction.

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keysUse the Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (highlighted with the red box around it).

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the Growth at Feet screen.

Growth at Feet

3-62 Horizontal Alignment

Page 143: 2130 Laser Alignment

The Growth at Feet screen displays the calculated vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. Growth in the vertical direction is displayed in the upper section of the screen while growth in the horizontal direction is displayed in the lower section of the screen.

The amount of thermal growth that both machines will experience during opera-tion can be expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the ana-lyzer units. Thermal growth values correspond to the amount each shaft moves in the vertical and horizontal directions directly above each foot.

NoteIf one or both machines actually experience a downward growth during operation, then negative numbers are used for the vertical direction. If one or both machines experience a growth to the right during operation, then negative numbers are used for the horizontal direction.

Edit Growth Values keyUse the Edit Growth Values key to edit the growth values.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to either the Foot Pre-Check screens or the data acquisition screens. Once all required dimensions have been entered, the Enter Dimensions step back on the Main screen will be marked completed and you will advance to the next step in the procedure.

3-63Laser Address Selection

Page 144: 2130 Laser Alignment

Gap/Offset

If Gap/Offset has been defined as the thermal growth method for the job, you are able to input the vertical and horizontal thermal growth using the target gap and offset readings at the coupling. This is probably the most the commonly used con-version method of specifying thermal growth targets. The program then uses this information to calculate the vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. This method consists of the following three screens.

Enter Gap/Offset Dimensions

The Enter Gap/Offset Dimensions screen, allows you to enter the dimensions for the coupling and its relationship with respect to the machine feet locations as defined in the Enter Dimensions screen.

Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. All dimensions must be entered before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for the U dimension are 0.01 to 3600 inches or 0.254 to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the V dimension are -3600 to 3600 inches or -91440 to 91440 mm.

3-64 Horizontal Alignment

Page 145: 2130 Laser Alignment

When entering any of the machine dimensions, they should be measured and extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.

Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-lighted with the red box around it).

Dimension Measurement DescriptionMeasure

to the Nearest

U Diameter of the coupling. This is also, the circumference of the coupling divided by 3.14 (pi).

1/8 inch(3 mm)

V Center of inboard foot on the left machine to the sensor location on the coupling. This is usually the center of the coupling.

1/8 inch(3 mm)

3-65Laser Address Selection

Page 146: 2130 Laser Alignment

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the Enter Gap/Offset Target screen.

Enter Gap/Offset Target

The Enter Gap/Offset Target screen, allows you to enter the gap and offset thermal growth target numbers at the coupling.

Growth in the vertical direction is displayed in the upper section of the screen while growth in the horizontal direction is displayed in the lower section of the screen.

The amount of thermal growth that both machines will experience during opera-tion can be expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the ana-lyzer units. If thermal growth is negligible, either leave it blank or enter zeroes. At least one non-zero value must be entered before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for both the gap and offset are 0 to 2048 mils or 0 to 52.02 mm.

Gap is the difference in the coupling halves at the top and at the bottom at the spec-ified diameter. If the number is greater at the top, the gap is considered to be “open” on the top. If the number is greater at the bottom, the gap is considered to be “open” on the bottom.

3-66 Horizontal Alignment

Page 147: 2130 Laser Alignment

Offset is the difference in the coupling halves at the top. For this parameter, either the coupling of the left machine is higher than the right machine or the coupling of the right machine is higher than the left machine.

Set Gap and Set Offset keysUse the Set Gap and Set Offset keys to enter the gap and offset thermal growth for the corresponding direction.

Set Direction keysUse the Set Direction keys to define whether the coupling gap is open at the top or bottom and to set whether the coupling offset of the left machine is higher than the right machine or the coupling offset of the right machine is higher than the left machine for the corresponding direction.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the Growth at Feet screen.

The Growth at Feet screen displays the calculated vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. Refer to the Growth at Profile section on page 3-59 for more information.

3-67Laser Address Selection

Page 148: 2130 Laser Alignment

Face/Rim

If Face/Rim has been defined as the thermal growth method for the job, you are able to input the amount of vertical and horizontal thermal growth using target face and rim dial indicator readings. This is probably the second-most commonly used, conversion method of specifying thermal growth targets. The program will then use this information to calculate the vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. This method consists of the following three screens.

Enter Face/Rim Dimensions

The Enter Face/Rim Dimensions screen, allows you to enter the dimensions for the coupling and its relationship with respect to the machine feet locations as defined in the Enter Dimensions screen.

Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. All dimensions must be entered before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for the U dimension are 0.01 to 3600 inches or 0.254 to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the V dimension are -3600 to 3600 inches or -91440 to 91440 mm.

3-68 Horizontal Alignment

Page 149: 2130 Laser Alignment

When entering any of the machine dimensions, they should be measured and extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.

Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-lighted with the red box around it).

Enter Face/Rim Dimensions (measurement location)

Dimension Measurement DescriptionMeasure

to the Nearest

U Diameter of the coupling. This is also, the circumference of the coupling divided by 3.14 (pi).

1/8 inch(3 mm)

VCenter of inboard foot on the left machine to the sensor location on the coupling. This is usually the center of the coupling.

1/8 inch(3 mm)

3-69Laser Address Selection

Page 150: 2130 Laser Alignment

Change Sensor Location keyUse the Change Sensor Location key, when the coupling is selected (highlighted with the red box around it), to change the side of the coupling on which the target dial indicator readings are to be taken. The sensor location determines the direc-tion (sign) of the Rim TIR (Total Indicator Runout). For example, if the left machine was to be set 3 mils high, then if the sensor location was specified to be on the left machine shaft and the top target reading was 0.0, the bottom reading would be -6.0 mils. With the same conditions and the sensor specified to be on the right machine shaft, the bottom reading would be +6.0 mils.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the Enter Face/Rim Target screen.

Enter Face/Rim Target

The Enter Face/Rim Target screen, allows you to enter the target face and rim dial indicator readings.

3-70 Horizontal Alignment

Page 151: 2130 Laser Alignment

The target face and rim dial indicator readings can be expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. All values must be entered before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for both the face and rim readings are -2048 to 2048 mils or -52.02 to 52.02 mm.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-lighted with the red box around it).

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the Growth at Feet screen.

The Growth at Feet screen displays the calculated vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. Refer to the Growth at Profile section on page 3-59 for more information.

3-71Laser Address Selection

Page 152: 2130 Laser Alignment

Reverse Dial

If Reverse Dial has been defined as the thermal growth method for the job, you are able to input the amount of vertical and horizontal thermal growth using target reverse dial indicator readings. The program will then use this information to cal-culate the vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. This method consists of the following three screens.

Enter Reverse Dial Dimensions

The Enter Reverse Dial Dimensions screen, allows you to enter the dimensions for the sensor locations and their relationship with respect to the machine feet loca-tions as defined in the Enter Dimensions screen.

Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. All dimensions must be entered before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for the M dimension are -3600 to 3600 inches or -91440 to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the N dimension are 0.01 to 3600 inches or 0.254 to 91440 mm.

3-72 Horizontal Alignment

Page 153: 2130 Laser Alignment

When entering any of the machine dimensions, they should be measured and extended to the nearest 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions sec-tion on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.

Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-lighted with the red box around it).

Dimension Measurement DescriptionMeasure

to the Nearest

M Center of inboard foot on the left machine to the sensor location on the left machine shaft.

1/16 inch(1.5 mm)

NSensor location on the left machine shaft across the coupling to the sensor location on the right machine shaft.

1/16 inch(1.5 mm)

3-73Laser Address Selection

Page 154: 2130 Laser Alignment

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the Enter Reverse Dial Target screen.

Enter Reverse Dial Target

The Enter Reverse Dial Target screen, allows you to enter the target reverse dial indicator readings.

The target reverse dial indicator readings can be expressed in either mils or milli-meters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. All values must be entered before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for any of the dial indicator readings is -2048 to 2048 mils, or -52.02 to 52.02 mm.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-lighted with the red box around it).

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the Growth at Feet screen.

3-74 Horizontal Alignment

Page 155: 2130 Laser Alignment

The Growth at Feet screen displays the calculated vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. Refer to the Growth at Profile section on page 3-59 for more information.

Sweep Laser Heads

Once all required machine dimensions have been entered, you are automatically advanced to the Sweep Laser Heads step. From the Main screen, the Sweep Laser Heads screens are reached by pressing the Sweep Laser Heads key. If the Foot Pre-Check option is not enabled, you will advance to the data acquisition screens. If the Foot Pre-Check option is enabled, you will advance to the Foot Pre-Check screens.

Main screen after entering required dimensions

From the Sweep Laser Heads step, you can acquire the data using the alignment method defined for the job and if desired, you can perform a Soft Foot or FDI check. Refer to the Acquiring Alignment Data section on page 3-82 for more infor-mation about acquiring alignment data. Refer to the Foot Pre-Check section on page 3-76 for more information about performing a Foot Pre-Check.

3-75Laser Address Selection

Page 156: 2130 Laser Alignment

Foot Pre-Check

The Foot Pre-Check option allows you to check the soft foot condition of the machine being aligned. Refer to “Machinery Shaft Alignment — General Overview” on page A-1 for more information.

If this option is enabled for this job, the Foot Pre-Check screens will be automati-cally displayed only once as you advance through the procedure. After you com-plete or skip this option it will not be automatically displayed again. However, you can perform or access this option any time during the procedure from the data acquisition screens. Refer to the Acquiring Alignment Data section on page 3-82 for more information.

Positioning heads for a Foot Pre-Check

The type of Foot Pre-Check selected for the job determines the first Foot Pre-Check screen displayed. From this screen (independent of the type selected) you are prompted to verify that all hold-down bolts are tight and position the laser heads at the starting angle. Ensure that the laser heads are at the top position (0°), or at the bottom position (180°).

3-76 Horizontal Alignment

Page 157: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

In the upper section of the screen you will find 8 machine feet positions displayed graphically around the machine.

Up and Down Arrow keysUse the Up and Down Arrow keys to select the foot to be checked (highlighted with the red box around it). In the screen above, the right outboard foot of the left machine has been selected.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to complete (end) the Foot Pre-Check and advance to the data acquisition screen. Once this option has been completed, it will not be automati-cally displayed if the Sweep Laser Heads step is re-entered.

NoteEmerson recommends that you always check all feet before acquiring alignment data.

The current laser head position (represented by a hash mark on the outer most part of the circle) is displayed graphically at the bottom of the screen. The average angle reading will be displayed within the circle. The background of the circle will be white if the laser heads are not within 2° of each other and 3° of 0° or 180°. The background of the circle will be green if the laser heads are within 2° of each other and 3° of 0° or 180°.

3-77Laser Address Selection

Page 158: 2130 Laser Alignment

Foot Pre-Check Function Keys (prior to starting the Foot Pre-Check)

Start Use the Start key to start the foot pre-check once you have verified that all hold-down bolts are tight and positioned the laser heads.

Clear All Use the Clear All key to clear all acquired data on all feet if data has been acquired and stored on any foot. Before any data is cleared, a warning message will be dis-played asking you if this is truly the operation to be performed. If you answer yes, then the data stored on all of the feet will be cleared. If you answer no the operation is aborted.

SkipUse the Skip key to skip the Foot Pre-Check and advance to the data acquisition screen. Once this option is skipped, it will not be automatically displayed if the Sweep Laser Heads step is re-entered. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Set Soft Foot Use the Set Soft Foot key to change the Foot Pre-Check type to Soft Foot.

Set FDIUse the Set FDI key to change the Foot Pre-Check type to FDI.

3-78 Horizontal Alignment

Page 159: 2130 Laser Alignment

Check Lasers Use the Check Lasers key to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Performing a Foot Pre-Check

Once the Foot Pre-Check starts, a prompt displays as notification to loosen the hold-down bolt for the selected foot and wait for the data to stabilize. The arrow displays within the circle at the bottom of the screen and assists in determining data stability. When data is unstable, the arrow turns (rotates). When data is stable, the arrow stops turning.

Once the arrow stops turning, accept the reading and either select another foot or advance beyond the Foot Pre-Check. After accepting a reading, it is evaluated based on the type of Foot Pre-Check being used.

Caution!Be sure to retighten the bolt after you have accepted the reading for that foot before starting another check or acquiring any alignment data.

3-79Laser Address Selection

Page 160: 2130 Laser Alignment

Soft FootThe Soft Foot calculation is equal to ((the magnitude of the movement of the foot) divided by (dimension C — Bracket to Sensor distance)) divided by the Soft Foot Tolerance. The default Soft Foot Tolerance = 0.5 mils / inch. If Soft Foot has been defined for the job, the data is evaluated as follows:

• OK

The measurement for Soft Foot is within the specified tolerance.

• X

The measurement is from 1 to 2 times the specified tolerance

(1x tolerance < measurement < 2x tolerance).

• XX

The measurement is from 2 to 3 times the specified tolerance

(2x tolerance < measurement < 3x tolerance).

• XXX

The measurement is greater than 3x tolerance.

This method does not display a number as the machine is being checked for soft foot (to prevent you from mistaking this number for a shim correction).

Frame Distortion Index (FDI)The FDI calculation is equal to ((the magnitude of the movement of the foot) divided by (dimension C — Bracket to Sensor distance)) multiplied by two times the foot to foot distance. If FDI has been defined for the job, the data is evaluated as fol-lows:

• “No Box”

The measurement condition is excellent (less than 2.0).

• “Clear Box”

The measurement condition is acceptable (between 2.0 and 3.0).

• “Dark Box”

The measurement condition is out of tolerance (greater than 3.0).

3-80 Horizontal Alignment

Page 161: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteBoth the Soft Foot and FDI tolerance values can be changed in UltraMgr and transferred to the Advanced Laser Align program.

Warning!The numbers displayed are not the required correction shims for this foot. Soft Foot and FDI corrections frequently require wedge shaped arrangements of shims to be installed. However, the actual thickness and shape of the Soft Foot and FDI correction must be determined by using a feeler gauge.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to accept and store the reading for the active foot. The Accept key can be used to do the same.

3-81Laser Address Selection

Page 162: 2130 Laser Alignment

Foot Pre-Check Function Keys (after the Foot Pre-Check has been started)

Accept Use the Accept key to accept and store the reading for the active foot. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Check Lasers Use the Check Lasers key to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Acquiring Alignment Data

To provide data acquisition for varying applications, circumstances, and prefer-ences, a number of different data collection methods are provided. Therefore, data acquisition screens vary depending on the alignment method defined for the job. The method to be used is defined on the Alt Main screen. These methods include:

• Auto Sweep

Data is automatically acquired while the shaft is rotated. The arc of rotation can vary from as little as 45° to a full 360° (one revolution). This method is especially useful when the 4 point measurement technique is impractical or when inconsistencies in shaft position exist at points in the rotation. Averaging mode allows many revolu-tions. Refer to the Auto Sweep section on page 3-85 for more information.

• Manual Sweep

Data is measured each time the laser heads are in alignment and the number keypad is pressed. Data from up to 180 positions may be recorded. This method is especially useful for performing uncoupled or non-rotational alignments or when too much background vibration is present. This method functions similarly to the Auto Sweep mode except that the laser heads, or shafts, are stopped at each posi-tion where data is to be taken and a key pressed to store a reading. Refer to the Manual Sweep section on page 3-94 for more information.

• Auto 4 Point

3-82 Horizontal Alignment

Page 163: 2130 Laser Alignment

The four point automatic mode is a more traditional style of acquiring data for alignment. The laser heads are mounted on a shaft, and the shaft is then rotated so that data can be taken when the laser heads are at the 12 o’clock (0 or 360°), 3 o’clock (90°), 6 o’clock (180°), and 9 o’clock (270°) positions. The readings are continuously averaged whenever the laser heads are at one of these positions and automatically recorded when the shaft is rotated to the next position. The aver-aging process reduces variation from jitter due to background vibration or from slight changes in the angular position of the heads. Refer to the Auto 4 Point sec-tion on page 3-100 for more information.

• Manual 4 Point

Similar to the Auto 4 Point mode except that the user has complete control over when data is acquired and which of the four measurement positions it will be used in. This method is useful when the machinery is not mounted in a true horizontal orientation, so that the inclinometer is not effective or when the clock positions rel-ative to vertical and horizontal base movements of the machine are nonstandard. Refer to the Manual 4 Point section on page 3-105 for more information.

• Dual Pass

Functions similar to the Auto Sweep mode except data is automatically acquired as each laser head passes by each other. This method, like Manual Sweep, is useful for performing uncoupled or non-rotational alignments. Refer to the Dual Pass sec-tion on page 3-119 for more information.

4 Point Methods - General Information There are two fundamental methods by which the data is acquired for shaft align-ment calculations: the 4 point modes and the sweep modes. The 4 point modes require data to be taken at positions perpendicular and parallel to the axis in which the machine's horizontal position can be adjusted. This is sometimes called the clock method and most often uses data readings at 12 o'clock (0 or 360°), at 3 o'clock (90°), at 6 o'clock (180°), and at 9 o'clock (270°). This is typical of the data acquired by those trained in using a scaled graph to manually arrive at an align-ment solution using the reverse dial indicator method.

3-83Laser Address Selection

Page 164: 2130 Laser Alignment

When using the 4 point methods, ideally, the sum of the two horizontal measure-ments will equal the sum of the two vertical measurements. This relationship may be used to check the data for validity. Any variance greater then 10-20% is a cause for concern. When this occurs, repeat the readings to verify that a variation wasn't accidentally introduced by the user. For example, using the fixtures as levers to turn the shaft or not controlling the torsional play in the coupling as the shaft is turned. Damaged regions in rolling element bearings and shaft rubs could also cause prob-lems, but are less common.

Because of this mathematical relationship, having any 3 of the 4 points allows the fourth point to be calculated. This can be useful when obstructions only allow you to rotate the laser fixtures to three of the four clock positions. Unfortunately, esti-mating the fourth point like this removes the ability to check the validity of the data. Abnormal readings at any one of the three known points could cause error. There-fore, use this technique with caution and only when absolutely necessary. Emerson recommends using a partial sweep method rather than the three 90° clock points if the arc of rotation is restricted.

Sweep Methods - General Information The sweep modes use data acquired at several different angular positions. By using Emerson’s patented process, this data is translated into readings for the four clock positions. There are several advantages to the sweep method over the 4 point method of acquiring data. Data does not have to be acquired at 3 or 4 specific angular locations; any angular positions will work. More data points are used to arrive at the true rotational behavior of the shaft; therefore, a discrepancy in one area of the rotation does not have as great an effect. If a full rotation of the shaft is not possible, the three point method still requires at least 180° of shaft rotation, which must begin at one of the four designated positions; the sweep method can use rotations less than 90° starting from any position. However, keep in mind that no matter what method is used, reconstructing a complete picture using partial data is never as desirable as starting with a complete picture.

3-84 Horizontal Alignment

Page 165: 2130 Laser Alignment

Auto Sweep

If Auto Sweep has been defined as the laser alignment method for the job, the laser heads automatically acquire data using their built-in inclinometers while the shaft is rotated. The arc of rotation can vary from as little as 45° to a full 360° (one revo-lution). This method is especially useful when the 4 point measurement technique is impractical or when inconsistencies in shaft position exist at points in the rota-tion.

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

With the Auto sweep method, data readings or values are automatically acquired and stored in the laser heads every 2°; therefore, in a 360° sweep, it is possible to acquire up to 180 data readings per laser head.

When setting the job up to use Auto Sweep as the Laser Align Method for acquiring data, you must also select the acquisition mode to be either Standard or Averaging.

3-85Laser Address Selection

Page 166: 2130 Laser Alignment

Standard ModeThis mode of operation (sometimes referred to as the Unidirectional Mode) is the mode that is most often used during Auto Sweep alignments. In this mode, a direc-tion of rotation is automatically defined for data acquisition based on the first rota-tion to progress past the starting point by 20°. In the Standard mode, data acquired in the data acquisition’s direction of rotation always overwrites any previous data stored at the same angular position. This includes data acquired at its defined angle position. In this mode of operation, once the direction of rotation is defined by the laser heads, only the data in that direction of rotation will be acquired; therefore, any backward rotation of the shaft due to backlash will not be acquired and thus will not affect the alignment results. The following scenario illustrates this more clearly.

1. When the analyzer initializes the laser heads, all data is cleared and their current position is defined as the starting point for determination of the data collection direction.

2. If the laser heads are rotated less than 20° in the counterclockwise position from the defined starting point, data is collected for this rotation but it is not committed and permanently stored.

3. If the counter-clockwise rotation is stopped before the 20° rotation and the laser heads are now rotated in the clockwise direction, data will be ignored (not acquired) until the starting point is reached again. At this point all data collected in the counter-clockwise direction is cleared and the data acquisition is started in the clockwise direction.

4. This mode of operation will continue as long as the laser heads are rotated in either the clockwise or counter-clockwise directions until a rotation of more than 20° occurs in one of the directions of rotation. Once the 20° point is passed, all acquired data is committed and stored and the direction of rotation is defined as the data acquisition’s direction of rotation.

5. Now data will only be acquired when the laser heads are rotated in the same direction as the defined data acquisition’s direction of rotation.

3-86 Horizontal Alignment

Page 167: 2130 Laser Alignment

Averaging Mode This mode of operation is intended to allow multiple sampling of data in order to reduce the noise in the data by averaging all of the acquired values. In the Aver-aging Mode, a direction of rotation for the data acquisition is defined in the same manner as it is in the Standard mode. However, instead of always over-writing the last data reading stored at the same angular position, the new readings will be aver-aged with the previous readings if the laser head has been moved at least 20° in the reverse direction or a full 360° sweep is performed. In this mode of operation, once the direction of rotation is defined by the laser heads, only the data in that direction of rotation will be acquired; therefore, any backward rotation of the shaft due to backlash will not be acquired and thus will not affect the alignment results. The fol-lowing scenario will clarify the intended operation.

1. Assume that the data acquisition’s direction of rotation is defined as clockwise (see scenario for Standard Mode).

2. If the laser heads are rotated in the clockwise direction to an angle of 50°, data is acquired and stored for each angular position in this rotation.

3. If the laser heads are then rotated in the counter-clockwise direction for 10° (back to an angle of 40°), all data acquired is ignored in the counter-clockwise direction since the direction of rotation is not in the data acquisition’s direction of rotation.

4. If the laser heads are again rotated in the clockwise direction for 25° (to an angle of 65°), the data acquired for each angular position will over-write the previous data acquired because the angle of negative rotation was not at least 20°.

5. If the laser heads are then rotated in the counter-clockwise direction for 30° (back to an angle of 35°), all data is ignored because of the direction of rotation.

6. Now if the laser heads are rotated in the clockwise direction for 360° - the data for the angular positions in the range 36°to 65° will be averaged with the previous values since there has been a rotation of at least 20° away from the stopping point. The data for the angular positions in the range 66° to 359° will receive a data value since the direction of rotation is correct. The data angular positions in the range 0° to 35° will be averaged with the previous values since the rotation in the clockwise direction passed the starting point (i.e. 360° sweep).

3-87Laser Address Selection

Page 168: 2130 Laser Alignment

There are four basic steps when acquiring alignment data using Auto Sweep.

1. Turn on and position the laser heads at the starting angle.2. Using the Laser Align program, initialize the laser heads.3. With the 2130 analyzer set aside, sweep the laser heads.4. Using the Laser Align program, get the acquired data from the laser heads.

3-88 Horizontal Alignment

Page 169: 2130 Laser Alignment

Positioning heads for Auto Sweep

The first data acquisition screen for Auto Sweep, prompts you to turn on and posi-tion the laser heads at the starting angle.

For this method, the position of the laser heads can be at any angular position you desire to start from. It is not required to define a sweep arc range and direction of rotation due to the increased number of data readings acquired every 2° and the process, which automatically defines the direction of rotation.

The current laser head position (represented by a hash mark on the outer most part of the circle) is displayed graphically at the bottom of the screen. The average angle reading will be displayed within the circle. The background of the circle will be white if the laser heads are not within 2° of each other and green when the laser heads are within 2° of each other.

Initialize Lasers keyUse the Initialize Lasers key to initialize the laser heads and advance to the next step in the procedure. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

3-89Laser Address Selection

Page 170: 2130 Laser Alignment

Foot Pre-Check keyUse the Foot Pre-Check key to perform a Soft Foot or FDI check. Refer to the Foot Pre-Check section on page 3-76 for more information about performing a Foot Pre-Check.

Check Lasers keyUse the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Review Results keyUse the Review Results key on the Alt screen to return to the Review Measurements screen where you can continue reviewing and averaging together the results from multiple acquisitions. This key is available only when the Review Results option is enabled on the Alt Main screen and the Review Measurements screen has been exited before the averaged reading set was saved. Refer to the Review Results sec-tion on page 3-121 for more information.

3-90 Horizontal Alignment

Page 171: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteA maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-played giving you the option of either discard the last reading set taken or overwriting the 20th reading set with the last reading.

Acquiring data using Auto Sweep

Once the laser heads have been initialized, the next screen prompts you to acquire the data by rotating the laser heads.

Get Data from Lasers keyUse the Get Data from Lasers key, after the laser heads have been rotated, to transmit or transfer the data from the laser heads to the analyzer and and to be advanced to the next step in the procedure. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

3-91Laser Address Selection

Page 172: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteFor the Auto Sweep and Dual Pass methods, if the laser heads have not yet been initialized and they have not been turned off since they last acquired the last set of data, the data stored in the heads can be transferred to the analyzer without having to re-sweep the laser heads. This is done using the Resend Data option on Alt Laser Configura-tion screen. This is useful if for some reason the data transfer from the heads to the analyzer was aborted before it was complete.

NoteFor the greatest accuracy and repeatability, all readings should be acquired using the same direction of rotation. In addition, it is best to rotate the laser heads in the direction in which the machine rotates when turning.

The 8215/8225 laser fixtures are designed to be rotated a full revolution in two sec-onds. As with any sweep, a smooth, uniform acceleration and deceleration during the rotation of the laser heads is necessary for accurate, reliable, and repeatable data.

3-92 Horizontal Alignment

Page 173: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteTo prevent damage to the laser heads, make sure the antennas do not come into contact with obstacles (e.g. the ground or base plate) as they are being rotated.

Getting data from heads

During the data transfer, the previous screen shows the progress of the data transfer for each laser head. When the data transfer is complete, the data is analyzed and a sine wave is curve fit to the data.

If the fit is satisfactory (85% and above), the program will mark the Sweep Laser Heads step back on the Main screen completed and advance you to the next step in the procedure. In addition to marking the Sweep Laser Heads step complete, the number of moves displayed in the upper section of the main screen is updated.

3-93Laser Address Selection

Page 174: 2130 Laser Alignment

If the fit is unsatisfactory (less than 85%) a warning message will be displayed to inform you that the data is “Unfit”. At this point you should either repeat the data acquisition or try to manually condition or edit the data using the edit data func-tion. This built-in check helps alert you to the data losing reliability in the misalign-ment calculations. Refer to the Display Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more information.

NoteRemember, when shaft movement due to causes other than misalign-ment is present in the data this will appear as randomness (noise) in the data. This is not normally a problem when the misalignment is great, but will increasingly interfere as the misalignment decreases. Therefore, the better the alignment the more likely the chance will be of getting an unfit data warning.

If you do encounter a machine where this becomes a problem too great to over-come (for example an unfit sine curve or the presence of too much background vibration), consider switching to an alternative method such as Manual Sweep or Auto 4 Point. Refer to the Sweep Mode Curve Data section on page 3-126 and Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

Manual Sweep

If Manual Sweep has been defined as the laser alignment method for the job, the laser head’s built-in inclinometers are used while the shaft is rotated, but data is manually acquired and stored in the Laser Align program instead of in the laser heads.

Manual Sweep functions similar to Auto Sweep except the laser heads, or shafts, are stopped at each position data is to be manually taken. Data (or samples as the Laser Align program refers to them) from up to 180 positions may be recorded. The arc of rotation can vary from as little as 45° to a full 360° (one revolution). The Manual Sweep mode is especially useful for performing uncoupled or non-rotational align-ments or when too much background vibration is present. This is the recom-mended sweep method for sweeps that are less than 75°.

3-94 Horizontal Alignment

Page 175: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

When setting the job up to use Manual Sweep as the Laser Align Method for acquiring data, you must also select the acquisition mode to be either Standard or Averaging and set the sample rate. The sample rate determines the number of data samples that are to be collected and averaged together to produce a single Laser PSD reading.

Standard ModeThis mode of operation is the mode that is most often used during Manual Sweep alignments. In the Standard mode, data acquired in the data acquisition’s direction of rotation will always overwrite any previous data stored at the same angular posi-tion.

3-95Laser Address Selection

Page 176: 2130 Laser Alignment

Averaging Mode The Averaging mode of operation is intended to allow multiple sampling of data in order to reduce the noise in the data by averaging all of the acquired values. In this mode of operation, the last 20 readings are averaged.

Starting Manual Sweep

On the data acquisition screen for Manual Sweep, the current laser reading (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer units) for each laser head is displayed in reverse video just below the corresponding machine. The current laser head positions (represented by a hash mark on the outer most part of the circles) are displayed graphically at the bottom of the screen. The angle reading will be displayed within the circle. The background of the circles will be white if the laser heads are not within 2° of each other and green when the laser heads are within 2° of each other.

3-96 Horizontal Alignment

Page 177: 2130 Laser Alignment

Accept Readings key

Use the Accept Readings key, when the laser head positions and data are as desired, to store the data. The number of samples, displayed in the center of the screen, will increment by one (180 max). Each time a data point is stored and the laser heads are rotated to a new position, a thinner line is left behind to denote where data was acquired.

NoteA minimum of 3 data points over a 45°sweep arc are required, but Emerson recommends a minimum of 8 data points (samples) acquired over a sweep arc of at least 90°.

NoteFor the greatest accuracy and repeatability, all readings should be acquired using the same direction of rotation. In addition, it is best to use the same direction of rotation as the machine normally operates.

Although the 8215/8225 laser fixtures are designed to be rotated a full revolution in two seconds - a smooth, uniform acceleration and deceleration during the rota-tion of the laser heads is necessary for accurate, reliable, and repeatable data collec-tion.

Caution!To prevent damage to the laser heads, make sure the antennas do not come into contact with obstacles (e.g. the ground or base plate) as they are being rotated. Also, when performing an uncoupled alignment and the laser heads are mounted in close proximity to each other, make sure the antennas do not come into contact with each other as one laser head is rotated past the other.

Clear keyUse the Clear key to clear the displayed data average, when the Laser Mode is set to Averaging. When the Laser Mode is set to Standard, this key is not available.

3-97Laser Address Selection

Page 178: 2130 Laser Alignment

Foot Pre-Check keyUse the Foot Pre-Check key to perform a Soft Foot or FDI check. If you choose to do one of the Foot Pre-Check procedures then the software returns a warning that any data, previously collected and contained in the current data set, is deleted by proceding with this operation. Refer to the Foot Pre-Check section on page 3-76 for more information about performing a Foot Pre-Check.

Check Lasers keyUse the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Review Results keyUse the Review Results key on the Alt screen to return to the Review Measurements screen where you can continue reviewing and averaging together the results from multiple acquisitions. This key is available only when the Review Results option is enabled on the Alt Main screen and the Review Measurements screen has been exited before the averaged reading set was saved. Refer to the Review Results sec-tion on page 3-121 for more information.

3-98 Horizontal Alignment

Page 179: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteA maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-played giving you the option to either discard the last reading set taken or overwrite the 20th reading set with the last reading.

Acquiring data using Manual Sweep

Enter keyUse the Enter key to accept the data, after you have acquired enough data (sam-ples). At this point the data is analyzed and a sine wave is curve fit to the data.

With Review Results enabled on the Alt Main Screen and a satisfactory fit (85% and above), the program marks the Sweep Laser Heads step as complete (Main Screen) and advances to the Review Measurements screen.

In addition to marking the Sweep Laser Heads step complete, the number of moves displayed in the upper section of the main screen is updated.

3-99Laser Address Selection

Page 180: 2130 Laser Alignment

If the fit is unsatisfactory (less than 85%), a warning message displays to inform that the data is “Unfit”. At this point either repeat the data acquisition, or try to manually condition or edit the data using the edit data function. This built-in check helps alert you to a problem with the reliability of the colleted data.. Refer to the Display Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more information.

NoteRemember, when shaft movement is due to factors other than mis-alignment measured, this will appear as randomness (noise) in the data. This is not normally a problem when the misalignment is great, but will increasingly interfere as the misalignment decreases. There-fore, the better the alignment the more likely the chance will be of getting an unfit data warning.

If you do encounter a machine where this becomes a problem too great to over-come (for example an unfit sine curve or the presence of too much background vibration), consider switching to an alternative method such as Auto 4 Point. Refer to the Sweep Mode Curve Data section on page 3-126 and Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

Auto 4 Point

If Auto 4 Point has been defined as the laser alignment method for the job, data is acquired at the traditional cardinal positions (0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°). In this method, the laser head’s built-in inclinometers are used while the shaft is rotated, but data is automatically acquired and stored in the Laser Align program instead of in the laser heads.

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

When setting the job up to use Auto 4 Point as the Laser Align Method for acquiring data, you must also set the sample rate. The sample rate determines the number of data samples that are to be collected and averaged together to produce a single Laser PSD reading.

3-100 Horizontal Alignment

Page 181: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteWhen using the Auto 4 Point method, an alternative option to increasing the number of samples (or increasing the data averaging beyond 25 samples per reading), would be to stop the laser fixtures at each of the four clock positions and allow the program to continu-ously average the data.

Starting Auto 4 Point

On the data acquisition screen for Auto 4 Point, the current angle position for each laser head is displayed just below the corresponding machine. The background area of the angle position is white if the laser heads are not within 5° of each other and 3° of the active cardinal position. The background area of the angle position is green if the laser heads are within 5° of each other and 3° of the active cardinal posi-tion.

3-101Laser Address Selection

Page 182: 2130 Laser Alignment

In addition to the green background, the analyzer LED will flash each time a new reading is measured when the laser heads are within 5° of each other and 3° of the active cardinal position. If the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 ana-lyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is enabled you will also hear the analyzer beep each time a new reading is measured when the laser heads are within 5° of each other and 3° of the active cardinal position.

If the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is disabled the analyzer will not beep when the laser heads are within 5° of each other and 3° of the active cardinal position. In this case only the analyzer LED will flash as described above.

The current laser reading (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer units) for each laser head is displayed in reverse video just below the corresponding angle position. These readings are continuously averaged whenever the laser heads are at one of the cardinal positions and automatically recorded when the shaft is rotated to the next position. The averaging process reduces variation from jitter due to background vibration or from slight changes in the angular position of the heads.

The traditional cardinal positions (0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°) are displayed graphically at the bottom of the screen just below the corresponding laser reading. The active position (highlighted with the red box around it) is the one for which data is being acquired.

3-102 Horizontal Alignment

Page 183: 2130 Laser Alignment

Caution!To prevent damage to the laser heads, make sure the antennas do not come into contact with obstacles (e.g., the ground or base plate) as they are being rotated. Also, when performing an uncoupled alignment and the laser heads are mounted in close proximity to each other, make sure the antennas do not come into contact with each other as one laser head is rotated past the other.

Acquiring Auto 4 Point Data

If the laser heads can only be rotated to three of the cardinal positions, the reading for the fourth will automatically be calculated when “Enter” is pressed after the third reading has been acquired. Using only three readings increases the likeli-hood of error and does not allow the instrument to check data validity. Emerson does not recommend using only three readings if four are available.

Clear keyUse the Clear key to clear and restart the current averaged laser reading for each laser head at any time.

3-103Laser Address Selection

Page 184: 2130 Laser Alignment

Foot Pre-Check keyUse the Foot Pre-Check key to perform a Soft Foot or FDI check. If you choose to do one of the Foot Pre-Check procedures, the software warns you that any previ-ously collected data in the present data collection set will be deleted. Refer to the Foot Pre-Check section on page 3-76 for more information about performing a Foot Pre-Check.

Check Lasers keyUse the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Review Results keyUse the Review Results key on the Alt screen to return to the Review Measurements screen where you can continue reviewing and averaging together the results from multiple acquisitions. This key is available only when the Review Results option is enabled on the Alt Main screen and the Review Measurements screen has been exited before the averaged reading set was saved. Refer to the Review Results sec-tion on page 3-121 for more information.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to accept the data, after you have acquired it. At this point the data is checked for validity. Refer to the Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

If the data validity is satisfactory, and Review Results is enabled on the Alt Main screen, the software displays the Review Measurements screen. If data validity is sat-isfactory and Review Results is not enabled, the program will mark the Sweep Laser Heads step back on the Main screen completed and advance you to the next step in the procedure. In addition to marking the Sweep Laser Heads step complete, the number of moves displayed in the upper section of the main screen is updated.

NoteA maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-played giving you the option to either discard the last reading set taken or overwrite the 20th reading set with the last reading.

3-104 Horizontal Alignment

Page 185: 2130 Laser Alignment

If the data validity is unsatisfactory a warning message displays to inform you that an unsatisfactory data validity condition exists. At this point you should repeat the data acquisition. This built-in check helps alert you to the data losing reliability in the misalignment calculations.

NoteFor the greatest accuracy and repeatability, all readings should be acquired using the same direction of rotation. In addition, it is best to rotate the heads in the same direction the machine rotates when run-ning.

NoteRemember, when shaft movement due to factors other than misalignment is present in the data, this will appear as randomness (noise) in the data. This is not normally a problem when the misalignment is great, but will increas-ingly interfere as the misalignment decreases. Therefore, the better the align-ment the more likely the chance will be of getting a data validity warning.

Manual 4 Point

If Manual 4 Point has been defined as the laser alignment method for the job, the user has complete control over when data is acquired and which of the four mea-surement positions data is to be acquired in. This method is useful when the machinery is not mounted in a true horizontal orientation, so that the inclinom-eter is not effective, or when the clock positions relative to vertical and horizontal base movements of the machine are nonstandard. This method is similar to Auto 4 Point except in this method data is manually acquired and stored in the Laser Align program. Also, readings are not continuously averaged whenever the laser heads are at one of the cardinal positions.

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

3-105Laser Address Selection

Page 186: 2130 Laser Alignment

When setting the job up to use Manual 4 Point as the Laser Align Method for acquiring data, you must also set the sample rate. The sample rate determines the number of data samples that are to be collected and averaged together to produce a single Laser PSD reading.

Starting Manual 4 Point

On the data acquisition screen for Manual 4 Point, the current angle position for each laser head is displayed just below the corresponding machine. The back-ground area of the angle position will be white if the laser heads are not within 5° of each other and 3° of the active cardinal position. The background area of the angle position will be green if the laser heads are within 5° of each other and 3° of the active cardinal position.

In Manual 4 Point, the analyzer LED and beeper are not active when the laser heads are within 5° of each other and 3° of the active cardinal position as it is in Auto 4 Point.

3-106 Horizontal Alignment

Page 187: 2130 Laser Alignment

Accept Readings keyUse the Accept Readings key, when the laser head positions and data are as desired, to store the data at the active cardinal position. Each time a data point is stored the next cardinal position in the clockwise direction is selected (highlighted with the red box around it).

Hide Laser Angle keyUse the Hide Laser Angle key on the Alt Manual 4 Point screen to hide the laser angle. This option is necessary when performing alignments on vertically mounted machinery where the movement is at the feet instead of a flange and on machinery where the clock positions relative to vertical and horizontal base movements of the machine are nonstandard. This option can also be changed from the Alt Laser Head Status screen and the Manual 4 Point Live Move option.

Show Laser Angle keyUse the Show Laser Angle key similarly as you would the Hide Laser Angle key except this key is used to show the laser angle if it is hidden. This option can also be changed from the Alt Laser Head Status screen and the Manual 4 Point Live Move option.

The current laser reading (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer units) for each laser head is displayed in reverse video just below the corresponding angle position.

The traditional cardinal positions (0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°) are displayed graphically at the bottom of the screen just below the corresponding laser reading. The active position (highlighted with the red box around it) is the one for which data is being acquired.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to manually select the active cardinal position.

When using this method, you must be very careful to get the desired readings into the desired positions. All readings should be 90° from each other, but this does allow the program to handle special circumstances where the shaft of the machine is not in the horizontal plane. There are no safeguards against data being placed in the wrong position.

3-107Laser Address Selection

Page 188: 2130 Laser Alignment

Caution!To prevent damage to the laser heads, make sure the antennas do not come into contact with obstacles (e.g. the ground or base plate) as they are being rotated. Also, when performing an uncoupled alignment and the laser heads are mounted in close proximity to each other, make sure the antennas do not come into contact with each other as one laser head is rotated past the other.

Foot Pre-Check keyUse the Foot Pre-Check key to perform a Soft Foot or FDI check. If you choose to do one of the Foot Pre-Check procedures, the software warns you that any previ-ously collected data in the present data collection set will be deleted. Refer to the Foot Pre-Check section on page 3-76 for more information about performing a Foot Pre-Check.

Check Lasers keyUse the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Review Results keyUse the Review Results key on the Alt screen to return to the Review Measurements screen where you can continue reviewing and averaging together the results from multiple acquisitions. This key is available only when the Review Results option is enabled on the Alt Main screen and the Review Measurements screen has been exited before the averaged reading set was saved. Refer to the Review Results sec-tion on page 3-121 for more information.

3-108 Horizontal Alignment

Page 189: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteA maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message dis-plays which provides the option to either discard the last reading set taken or overwrite the 20th reading set with the last reading.

Acquiring Manual 4 Point Data

If the laser heads can only be rotated to three of the cardinal positions, the fourth will be automatically calculated when Enter is pressed and after the third reading has been acquired. Using only three readings increases the likelihood of error and does not allow the instrument to check data validity. Emerson does not recom-mend using only three readings if four are available.

Clear All keyUse the Clear All key to clear all the data stored at each of the cardinal positions at any time.

3-109Laser Address Selection

Page 190: 2130 Laser Alignment

Enter keyUse the Enter key to accept the data, after you have acquired it. At this point the data is checked for validity. Refer to the Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

If the data validity is satisfactory, and Review Results is enabled on the Alt Main screen, the software displays the Review Measurements screen. If data validity is sat-isfactory and Review Results is not enabled, the program will mark the Sweep Laser Heads step back on the Main screen completed and advance you to the next step in the procedure. In addition to marking the Sweep Laser Heads step complete, the number of moves displayed in the upper section of the main screen is updated.

If the data validity is unsatisfactory a warning message displays to inform that an unsatisfactory data validity condition exists. At this point you should repeat the data acquisition. This built-in check helps alert you to a problem with the reliability of the collected data.

NoteFor the greatest accuracy and repeatability, all readings should be acquired using the same direction of rotation. In addition, it is best to rotate the lasers in the same direction the machine rotates when run-ning.

NoteRemember, when shaft movement due to causes other than misalignment is present in the data, this will appear as randomness (noise) in the data. This is not normally a problem when the misalignment is great, but will increas-ingly interfere as the misalignment decreases. Therefore, the better the align-ment the more likely the chance will be of getting a data validity warning.

3-110 Horizontal Alignment

Page 191: 2130 Laser Alignment

Dual Pass

If Dual Pass has been defined as the laser alignment method for the job, the laser heads automatically acquire data using their built-in inclinometers as each laser head passes by each other. Except for how the data is acquired, this method func-tions similar to Auto Sweep, but like Manual Sweep, it is useful for performing uncoupled or non-rotational alignments.

The arc of rotation can vary from as little as 45° to a full 360° (one revolution). This method is especially useful when the 4 point measurement technique is impractical or when inconsistencies in shaft position exist at points in the rotation.

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

With this method, PSD and angle data are only taken when the laser beam of each laser head enters the “valid data” window centered on the vertical centerline of the other head’s PSD.

NoteWith the Dual Pass method, a special cable is required to synchronize the two laser heads since they will be moved independently of each other and will not always be in alignment with each other. When using direct connect communication, the Model 821510 direct con-nect cable is connected between the laser heads and analyzer to syn-chronize the laser heads while using the Dual Pass method. When using RF communication, the Model 8215C2-PM Dual Pass cable is connected between the two laser heads to synchronize the laser heads while using the Dual Pass method. For longer spans the Model 800002 and Model 800003 extension cables can be added between the Model 821510 direct connect cable and Model 8215C2-PM Dual Pass cable and the laser heads. No matter which communication method you choose to use, the appropriate cable must be connected to the laser fixtures prior to initializing them.

3-111Laser Address Selection

Page 192: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteThe Model 800001 direct connect cable can be used to enable the laser heads to communicate with the analyzer except when using the Dual Pass method.

When setting the job up to use Dual Pass as the Laser Align Method for acquiring data, you must also set the Target Window percentage.

Target Window When using the Dual Pass method, data closest to the PSD's vertical centerline is used to calculate the alignment condition of the machinery being aligned. The Target Window determines the size of the valid data window around the vertical centerline of the other laser head's PSD in which data is to be acquired as the laser beam passes across the PSD. No data is acquired as the laser beam passes across the PSD outside of the valid data window. The Target Window can be set to 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100%. The default is 100%. Typically a 100% Target Window is suf-ficient, but for increased accuracy and repeatability you may want to decrease the size of the Target Window to ensure that data is being acquired as close to the PSD's vertical centerline as possible.

3-112 Horizontal Alignment

Page 193: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteIf a lower percentage (smaller valid window) is selected, a slower rota-tional speed may be required especially with a smaller PSD (e.g. with the 10x10mm PSD on the 8215). For example, a 10% Target Window would define a 2mm wide window on an 8225 and a 1mm wide window on an 8215 centered around the PSD's vertical center-line in which data will be acquired as the laser beam passes across the window.

Starting Dual Pass

The first data acquisition screen for Dual Pass, prompts you to turn on and position the laser heads at the starting angle. For this method, the laser beams do not have to be on the PSD (unlike the other methods); therefore, the position of each laser head can be at any angular position from which you desire to start. It is not required to define a sweep arc range and direction of rotation due to the process which auto-matically defines the direction of rotation.

3-113Laser Address Selection

Page 194: 2130 Laser Alignment

Initialize Lasers keyUse the Initialize Lasers key to initialize the laser heads and advance to the next step in the procedure. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Foot Pre-Check keyUse the Foot Pre-Check key to perform a Soft Foot or FDI check. If you choose to do one of the Foot Pre-Check procedures, the software warns you that any previ-ously collected data in the present data collection set will be deleted. Refer to the Foot Pre-Check section on page 3-76 for more information about performing a Foot Pre-Check.

Check Lasers keyUse the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

Review Results keyUse the Review Results key on the Alt screen to return to the Review Measurements screen where you can continue reviewing and averaging together the results from multiple acquisitions. This key is available only when the Review Results option is enabled on the Alt Main screen and the Review Measurements screen has been exited before the averaged reading set was saved. Refer to the Review Results sec-tion on page 3-121 for more information.

3-114 Horizontal Alignment

Page 195: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteA maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-played giving you the option to either discard the last reading set taken or overwrite the 20th reading set with the last reading.

Acquiring data using Dual Pass

Once the laser heads have been initialized, the above screen prompts you to acquire the data by rotating the laser heads.

Get Data from Lasers keyUse the Get Data from Lasers key, after the laser heads have been rotated, to transmit or transfer the data from the laser heads to the analyzer and advance to the next step in the procedure. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

3-115Laser Address Selection

Page 196: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteFor the Auto Sweep and Dual Pass methods, if the laser heads have not yet been initialized and they have not been turned off since they acquired the last set of data, the data stored in the heads can be trans-ferred to the analyzer without having to re-sweep the laser heads. This is done using the Resend Data option on Alt Laser Configuration screen. This is useful if for some reason the data transfer from the heads to the analyzer was aborted before it was complete.

NoteFor the greatest accuracy and repeatability, all readings should be acquired using the same direction of rotation. In addition, it is best to rotate the laser heads in the same direction the machine rotates when running.

The 8215/8225 laser fixtures are designed to be rotated a full revolution in two sec-onds. As with any sweep, a smooth, uniform acceleration and deceleration during the rotation of the laser heads is necessary for accurate, reliable, and repeatable data.

Caution!To prevent damage to the laser heads, make sure the antennas do not come into contact with obstacles (e.g. the ground or base plate) as they are being rotated. Also, when performing an uncoupled alignment and the laser heads are mounted in close proximity to each other, make sure the antennas do not come into contact with each other as one laser head is rotated past the other.

The typical method of operation will be for the user to initialize the laser heads with the ana-lyzer. One of the heads will then be moved to a new position. Then the second head will be moved past the first head to a new position. As the laser heads pass each other, the data will be acquired. The first head will then be moved past the second head to a new position. Again, as the laser heads pass each other, both laser heads will acquire the data. This method continues until the user has acquired the necessary number of passes and downloads the data to the analyzer. This may include several full rotations of the laser heads.

3-116 Horizontal Alignment

Page 197: 2130 Laser Alignment

The following scenario will more clearly illustrate how the Dual Pass method oper-ates.

1. When the analyzer initializes the laser heads, all data is cleared. 2. The laser heads then begin detecting the presence of the other laser head’s

laser beam on its PSD. If a laser beam is not on a PSD, the laser head's LED will be flashed solid yellow.

3. When the laser beam on the other laser head is detected on its PSD, the laser beam is tracked as it crosses the PSD. As soon as the laser beam is detected on the PSD, the LED on the laser head will be or continue to be (depending on the state it originally started from) flashed solid yellow.

4. When a laser beam enters the “valid data” window around its PSD’s vertical centerline, data is acquired. As valid data is acquired, the laser head will flash its LED green once.

5. Data continues to be acquired while a laser beam is within the “valid data” window. The position data that is closest to the vertical centerline (i.e. horizontal position closest to zero) is the value that is retained along with its angular position. As each data sample is taken the LED on the Laser Head will flash green to indicate that a valid data point has been acquired.

6. If a laser beam passes across the PSD so quickly that a data point is not acquired within the “valid data” window, no data will be acquired.

7. When a laser beam leaves the PSD completely, the acquired data point is committed and stored.

8. The laser heads again begin detecting the presence of the other laser head’s laser beam on its PSD and their LED's flash solid yellow.

NoteOnce a valid reading is acquired, before it is committed and stored, the laser beam must leave the PSD completely.

NoteA reflected laser beam may strike the PSD in the valid window causing the LED to flash green. If this were to occur, this data (or event) would be considered invalid and ignored by the laser heads.

3-117Laser Address Selection

Page 198: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteA minimum of 3 data points over a 45° sweep arc are required, but Emerson recommends a minimum of 8 data points be acquired over a sweep arc of at least 90°.

NoteDepending on the model, make sure either the Model 821510 or 8215C2-PM cable is connected to the laser fixtures prior to initializing them.

Getting data from heads

3-118 Horizontal Alignment

Page 199: 2130 Laser Alignment

During the data transfer, the previous screen shows the progress of the data transfer for each laser head. When the data transfer is complete, the data is analyzed and a sine wave is fit to the data.. If the fit is satisfactory (85% and above), the program will mark the Sweep Laser Heads step back on the Main screen completed and advance you to the next step in the procedure. In addition to marking the Sweep Laser Heads step complete, the number of moves displayed in the upper section of the main screen is updated.

If the fit is unsatisfactory (less than 85%) a warning message displays to inform you that the data is “Unfit”. At this point you should either repeat the data acquisition or try to manually condition or edit the data using the edit data function. This built-in check helps alert you to a concern with the reliability of the collected data. Refer to the Display Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more information.

NoteRemember, when shaft movement due to factors other than misalign-ment is present in the data this will appear as randomness (noise) in the data. This is not normally a problem when the misalignment is great, but will increasingly interfere as the misalignment decreases. Therefore, the better the alignment the more likely the chance will be of getting an unfit data warning.

If you do encounter a machine where this becomes a problem too great to over-come (for example an unfit sine curve or the presence of too much background vibration), consider switching to an alternative method such as Manual Sweep or Auto 4 Point. Refer to the Sweep Mode Curve Data section on page 3-126 and Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

Dual Pass Cable (8215C2-PM) - Models 821500 and 822500 Only

The 8215C2-PM Dual Pass cable is required when using the Dual Pass method for RF communication between the analyzer and the laser fixtures.

3-119Laser Address Selection

Page 200: 2130 Laser Alignment

To connect the 8215C2-PM Dual Pass cable to the laser fixtures, complete these steps:

1. Connect the Lemo connector on one end of the Dual Pass cable to the mating straight Lemo connector of the extension cable, if applicable.

2. Connect the Lemo connector on one end of the cable to the Lemo port under the nose of one of the laser fixtures.

3. Connect the Lemo connector on the opposite end of the cable to the Lemo port under the nose of the other laser fixture.

NoteWhen connecting the Lemo connector to its mating connector, line up the red dots located on each connector with each other before completing the connections.

Caution!To complete connection and prevent damage to the laser heads and cables, make sure to push the connector together (Do not twist!).

From this point on, Dual Pass is very easy to use. The analyzer determines that it is connected. Cables can be unplugged and reconnected at any time (and at any con-nection). You do not have to remember which end of the cable is plugged to which head. Even if you switch the orientation of the cables (when reconnecting), the analyzer can adjust to the change and will still work correctly.

The Dual Pass cable (8215C2-PM), required when using the Dual Pass method with RF communication is 2 feet (0.61 m) long. When connected to the laser heads up to a 20 inch (508 mm) span can be aligned. Extension cables (Models 800002 and 800003) are available for longer spans.

NoteWith the 8215, a maximum of 30 feet (9 m) between laser heads can be achieved. With the 8225, a maximum of 100 feet (30.5 m) between laser heads can be achieved.

3-120 Horizontal Alignment

Page 201: 2130 Laser Alignment

Extension cables are 8 feet (2.4 m) long. With one extension cable and the Dual Pass cable, the total length is 10 feet (3 m) allowing a 9 feet 8 inch (2.9 m) span to be aligned.

NoteFor similar information on connecting the 821510 direct connect cable when using the Dual Pass method for direct connect communi-cation between the analyzer and the laser fixtures, refer to Direct Connect (All Models) section for more information.

Review Results

From the Review Results (Measurements) screen, you are able to review and average together the results from multiple acquisitions. This option is useful when the repeatability of the data is a concern. Refer to the Sweep Mode Curve Data sec-tion on page 3-126 and Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

The Review Measurements screen is automatically displayed immediately after acquiring a set of alignment data when the Review Results option is enabled on the Alt Main screen. This option is not available when Quick Spec mode is activated. Refer to the Quick Spec section on page 3-53 for more information.

3-121Laser Address Selection

Page 202: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteIf you exit the Review Measurements screen before saving the aver-aged reading set, you can return to it using the Review Results key on the Alt screen of the data acquisition screens.

Review Measurements Screen

The Review Measurements screen contains the alignment condition, the acquisi-tion date and time, and a symbol representing the acquisition method used for each of the readings acquired. The table can contain a maximum of 10 readings.

3-122 Horizontal Alignment

Page 203: 2130 Laser Alignment

If the Tolerance Type is Standard, alignment angle and offset data are displayed for both the vertical and horizontal directions. If the Tolerance Type is Jackshaft, align-ment left machine angle and right machine angle data are displayed.

An icon depicting the alignment method and data condition displays just to the far right of each data reading.

If Auto Sweep, Manual Sweep, or Dual Pass was used to acquire the reading and data quality is 85% or greater the icon will have a green background. If data quality is 70% or greater, but less than 85% the icon will have a yellow background. If data quality is less than 70% the icon will have a red background.

If Auto 4 Point or Manual 4 Point was used to acquire the reading and data validity is good the icon will have a green background. If data validity is poor the icon will have a yellow background. If data validity is bad the icon will have a red background. If one of the four points had been estimated the icon will have a gray background.

The average reading set is displayed at the bottom of the screen. If the alignment condition is within the acceptable tolerance value, the background color will be green. If it is within 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance value the background color will be yellow. If it is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance value, the background color will be red. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

Up and Down ArrowsUse the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of readings one at a time. The keys wrap around the list of readings. These keys are only active when more than one reading is listed. The Reading Up and Down Arrow soft keys can be used to do the same.

Offset Icon Angle Icon

3-123Laser Address Selection

Page 204: 2130 Laser Alignment

Enter keyUse the Enter key to save the average reading set and advance to the tolerance plot screens where graphical representations of the alignment condition can be reviewed.

NoteIf any reading used to calculate an average reading set was acquired using Auto Sweep, Manual Sweep, or Dual Pass, the associated sine fit data will not be saved once the average reading set is saved.

Review Results (Measurements) Function Keys

Repeat ReadingUse the Repeat Reading key to return back to the data acquisitions screen where additional data can be acquired. This key is only active when 10 or less readings are is listed.

NoteWhen 10 readings are displayed, you will need to delete a reading before you will be able to acquire another reading.

NoteIf you exit the Review Measurements screen when 10 readings are dis-played, then go to the Sweep Laser Heads step and acquire an eleventh reading, a warning message will be displayed when you return to the Review Measurements screen. The warning message will give you the option of either discarding the eleventh reading or deleting the first reading and keeping the eleventh. If you answer yes, then the first reading is deleted and the eleventh reading kept. If you answer no, then the eleventh reading is discarded. If you answer yes to deleting the first reading, it cannot be retrieved.

3-124 Horizontal Alignment

Page 205: 2130 Laser Alignment

Select/UnselectUse the Select/Unselect key to select the highlighted reading (place a check mark just to the left of the reading), or if the reading has already been selected, to unse-lect the reading (remove the check mark). The selected readings are used to calcu-late the average reading set displayed at the bottom of the screen. The average reading set will be updated when readings are selected or cleared. This key is only active when more than one reading is listed.

Delete ReadingUse the Delete Reading key to delete the highlighted reading. Before any reading is deleted, a warning message displays asking you if this is truly the operation to be performed. If you answer yes, then the highlighted reading will be deleted. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted. If the highlighted reading happens to be one of the selected readings used to calculate the average reading set displayed at the bottom of the screen the average reading set will be updated when the reading is deleted. This key is only active when more than one reading is listed.

Caution!Use extreme caution with the delete reading option when the analyzer contains important alignment data. Once you answer yes to the warning message all data associated with the deleted reading will be lost.

Data DetailUse the Data Detail key to advance to the tolerance plot screens where graphical representations of the alignment condition can be reviewed. Refer to the Data Detail (Tolerance Plots) section on page 3-162 for more information. In addition, if the data was acquired using the Auto Sweep, Dual Pass, or Manual Sweep methods you can manually condition or edit the sine curve data using the edit data function.

NoteThe average reading set will be displayed on the tolerance plots along with any previously saved reading sets. However, the Display Sine Fit and View Data keys, available on the tolerance plot screens, display the alignment information for the reading set highlighted back on the Review Measurements screen.

3-125Laser Address Selection

Page 206: 2130 Laser Alignment

Reading Up and Down ArrowsUse the Reading Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of readings one at a time. These soft keys will wrap around the list. These keys are only active when more than one reading is listed. The Up and Down Arrow keys can be used to do the same.

Sweep Mode Curve Data

When using the sweep mode, calculations are completed in the following manner. If readings were taken from each laser target at 1° intervals (with the position as the Y- axis and the rotational position as the X-axis), a sine wave would be formed. Even when only part of the sine wave data is collected, Emerson’s Alignment software can still curve fit a sine wave to this limited data. Called curve fitting, all values used to determine the machine moves can be obtained from the completed sine waves.

Emerson recommends you sweep at least 90°; however, accuracy still may be reduced even at 90°. At the very least, this could result in more machine moves being required to achieve satisfactory alignment. If data was acquired in a sweep arc of less than 70°, a warning message will be displayed advising you to retake the data. If you answer yes, then the data will be discarded and you will be advanced back to the data acquisition screen. If you answer no, then the data is stored and you advance to the next step in the procedure.

Each head will store up to 180 readings (the higher the number, the greater the accuracy), however, all 180 readings are not required to determine the curve fit sine wave. You must have at least three readings and they should be spaced at large intervals in the shaft rotation. If too few data points were acquired, a warning mes-sage displays advising you to retake the data.

After the sweep data has been transferred from the heads to the analyzer, the data will be automatically curve fit. The quality of the data is shown by the curve fit per-centage. If more points are located off the sine wave (the greater distance from the curve), the lower the percentage will be. A high number of points on the curve mean that most of the data were acquired from points that lay on the sine curve. Refer to the Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

If the data correlation (curve fit percentage) can not be brought into the accept-able level, but the peak-peak amplitude of the data is too low, then a message dis-plays advising you that the machine may be aligned within tolerance and the accuracy of any further adjustments may be reduced using the available data.

3-126 Horizontal Alignment

Page 207: 2130 Laser Alignment

If the data correlation can not be brought into the acceptable level but the peak-peak amplitude is too high, then a message will be displayed advising you to check the system for looseness and then repeat the measurement. Another possible reason for this condition could be due to data points lying too far away from the sine fit curve. To verify this condition, it will be necessary to check the sine fit curve for points which might lie far away from the sine fit curve and either edit the sine fit and remove the measurement points which might lie far away from the curve or change to a four point method and acquire new data.

Bearing faults, rubs, and looseness are all problems which can cause points not to fall on the curve. These mechanical problems can cause all data to have some low levels of variability. This variability may appear as randomness, or “noise”. This noise is not generally of much concern when the level of misalignment is high; however, as the amplitudes measured from misalignment decrease then the ratio of noise to the signal increases and the percentages of fit may worsen. Although the program automatically conditions the data for an improved fit in such a circumstance, there may be times when the user chooses to change methods or to manually condition the data using the edit data function. Refer to the Display Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more information.

Data Quality

When using Auto Sweep, Manual Sweep, or Dual Pass a sine curve is fit to the data points. This sine curve is analyzed to determine what the projected data would be at each of the clock positions mentioned above in the Auto 4 Point method. If the fit of the curve to the data points is marginal, then the data can be automatically conditioned to improve the sine fit. The resultant fit may be viewed and can be manually conditioned if desired. This procedure is discussed in the application chapter.

If the analyzer is unable to condition the data suitably, then a message will be dis-played warning of an “Unfit Data” condition. There is always some variability intro-duced into data due to shaft clearances, bearing faults, base deterioration, etc. If this variability becomes significant compared to the amount of misalignment (for example, due to the presence of too much background vibration), it may become necessary to look at the sine fit curve in order to determine the cause of the unfit sine fit and take corrective action. Alternatively, it may become necessary to use a 4 Point or Manual Sweep Method to acquire data. Changing methods does not require the job to be redefined. Merely select a new alignment method from the Alt Main screen and retake the last set of data.

3-127Laser Address Selection

Page 208: 2130 Laser Alignment

When using any 4 point method the data is always checked for validity. In theory, subtracting any third measurement from the sum of two opposing measurements will give the value of the 4th measurement (the one opposite the third measure-ment). For example, add the left and right measurements together then subtract the top measurement. The results should approximately equal the value of the bottom measurement. If this comparison varies by more than 20%, a message will be displayed warning of a Data Validity Error Reading Error Above 20%. When this happens, retake the last readings to check for accuracy before proceeding. There is always some variability introduced into data due to shaft clearances, bearing faults, base deterioration, etc.

NoteA maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-played giving you the option to either discard the last reading set taken or overwrite the 20th reading set with the last reading.

3-128 Horizontal Alignment

Page 209: 2130 Laser Alignment

Move Machine

Once all required data has been acquired, the screen automatically advances to the Move Machine step. From the Main screen, the Move Machine step is reached by pressing the Move Machine key.

Main screen after acquiring alignment data

From the Move Machine step, you can review the machine moves for the vertical and horizontal directions. Refer to the Vertical Move section on page 3-130 and Horizontal Move section on page 3-135 for more information. If an alignment cor-rection is necessary that requires a live move, this can also be done from this step. Refer to the Live Move section on page 3-149 for more information.

In Quick Spec Mode, only tolerance plot information will be available since machine move information can not be calculated without machine dimensions. For this reason, the tolerance plot screens will be displayed immediately after data has been acquired and analyzed. Refer to the Quick Spec section on page 3-53 for more information.

3-129Laser Address Selection

Page 210: 2130 Laser Alignment

To provide assistance for varying applications and circumstances, a couple of addi-tional options are provided. These additional options include:

• An Extra Foot Calculation

This option provides a calculation of the vertical and horizontal machine moves at machine foot locations other than those defined for the job. Refer to the Extra Foot Calculation section on page 3-143 for more information.

• A Predict Mode

This option allows you to calculate the resulting alignment condition based on the current alignment condition and making the machine moves you enter. Refer to the Predict Mode section on page 3-145 for more information.

Vertical Move

From the Vertical Move screen, you can review the machine moves for the vertical direction.

Vertical Move Screen

3-130 Horizontal Alignment

Page 211: 2130 Laser Alignment

The amount of movement at the machine feet (expressed in either mils or millime-ters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed in the upper section of the screen. If the movement is positive (upward) it will be displayed above the machine. If the movement is negative (downward) it will be displayed below the machine. In addition to the amount of movement, an arrow representing the direction of movement is also displayed at the machine feet where moves are to be made.

The bull’s-eye target displayed in the lower section of the screen represents the alignment condition with respect to the tolerances defined for the job. If the toler-ance condition is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer band will be red. If the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the middle band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the acceptable tolerance, but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center band (bull’s-eye) will be green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent tolerance, then the center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

When the Enable Alert option is enabled, the analyzer LED will flash during the live move when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values. Increasing and decreasing flash rates indicate when the machine alignment crosses through the acceptable and excellent tolerance condition thresholds described above. The number of flashes and flash rate will be consistent with the audible tone generated when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values. Refer to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more information.

If the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is enabled and the Enable Alert option is enabled, the audible tone will be generated as described above, but if the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is disabled and the Enable Alert option is enabled, the audible tone will not be generated as described above. In this case only the analyzer LED will flash as described above.

When the Enable Alert option is disabled, the analyzer LED will not flash and an audible tone will not be generated when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values.

3-131Laser Address Selection

Page 212: 2130 Laser Alignment

The alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine components defined for the job is displayed in the upper section of the screen while the align-ment condition of the machine with respect to the machine centerlines (repre-sented by dashed lines) is displayed in the lower section of the screen. In addition to the machine centerlines, the acceptable angular tolerance band (represented by an angle bracket) and offset tolerance band (represented by a square bracket) are also displayed in the lower section of the screen.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to toggle the machine move sets between alter-nate pairs of feet. The Alternate Move key can be used to do the same. Refer to the Vertical Move Function Keys: Alternate Move section (below) for more informa-tion.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the next step in the Horizontal Move screen.

Vertical Move Function Keys

Extra FootUse the Extra Foot key to advance to the Extra Foot screen where the vertical and horizontal machine moves for machine foot locations in addition to the ones defined for the job can be calculated. Refer to the Extra Foot Calculation section on page 3-143 for more information. This option is available only when the selected machine move foot pairs are located only on the left machine or the right machine.

Alternate MoveUse the Alternate Move key to toggle the machine move sets between alternate pairs of feet. The Left and Right Arrow keys can be used to do the same.

• If the RPM and all machine dimensions have been entered, then a total of six (6) alternate moves will be available.

• If only the RPM and A, B, C, and F dimensions have been entered, then no alter-nate solutions will be available for the right machine. In this case, a warning mes-sage will be displayed when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to verify whether or not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you answer yes, then you will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

3-132 Horizontal Alignment

Page 213: 2130 Laser Alignment

From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.

• If only the RPM and D, E, C, and F dimensions have been entered, then no alter-nate solutions will be available for the left machine. In this case, a warning message will be displayed when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to verify whether or not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you answer yes, then you will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.

• If the A dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions that include the A dimension will be available.

• If the E dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions that include the E dimension will be available.

• If the B dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions will be available for the left machine. In this case, a warning message will be displayed when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to verify whether or not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you answer yes, then you will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.

• If the D dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions will be available for the right machine. In this case, a warning message will be displayed when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to verify whether or not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you answer yes, then you will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer no, then the oper-ation is aborted.

From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.

Switch Move Type Use the Switch Move Type key to toggle the displayed move type between Vertical Move, Horizontal Move, and Dual Move (Horizontal and Vertical).

3-133Laser Address Selection

Page 214: 2130 Laser Alignment

Data DetailUse the Data Detail key to advance to the tolerance plot screens where graphical representations of the alignment condition can be reviewed. Refer to the Data Detail (Tolerance Plots) section on page 3-162 for more information. In addition, if the data was acquired using the Auto Sweep, Dual Pass, or Manual Sweep methods you can manually condition or edit the sine curve data using the edit data function.

Predict Use the Predict key to advance to the Predict Mode screen where the resulting alignment condition based on the current alignment condition and machine move values you enter can be calculated. Refer to the Predict Mode section on page 3-145 for more information. This option is available only when all dimensions for both machines have been entered.

Live MoveUse the Live Move key to observe machine movement while making machine moves. Refer to the Live Move section on page 3-149 for more information. If the Live Move option on the Alt Main screen is set to Horizontal Only, the Live Move key is not active on the Vertical Move screen. Refer to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more information.

3-134 Horizontal Alignment

Page 215: 2130 Laser Alignment

Horizontal Move

From the Horizontal Move screen review the machine moves for the horizontal direction.

Horizontal Move Screen

The amount of movement at the machine feet (expressed in either mils or millime-ters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed in the upper section of the screen. If the movement is positive (to the left — viewed from the outboard end of the right machine looking towards the left machine) it will be displayed below the machine. If the movement is negative (to the right — viewed from the outboard end of the right machine looking towards the left machine) it will be displayed above the machine. In addition to the amount of movement, an arrow repre-senting the direction of movement is also displayed at the machine feet on which the moves will be made.

3-135Laser Address Selection

Page 216: 2130 Laser Alignment

The bull’s-eye target displayed in the lower section of the screen represents the alignment condition with respect to the tolerances defined for the job. If the toler-ance condition is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer band will be red. If the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the middle band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the acceptable tolerance, but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center band (bull’s-eye) will be green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent tolerance, then the center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

When the Enable Alert option is enabled, the analyzer LED will flash during the live move when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values. Increasing and decreasing flash rates indicate when the machine alignment crosses through the acceptable and excellent tolerance condition thresholds described above. The number of flashes and flash rate will be consistent with the audible tone generated when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values. Refer to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more information.

If the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is enabled and the Enable Alert option is enabled, the audible tone will be generated as described above, but if the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is disabled and the Enable Alert option is enabled, the audible tone will not be generated as described above. In this case only the analyzer LED will flash as described above.

When the Enable Alert option is disabled, the analyzer LED will not flash and an audible tone will not be generated when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values.

The alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine components defined for the job is displayed in the upper section of the screen while the align-ment condition of the machine with respect to the machine centerlines (repre-sented by dashed lines) is displayed in the lower section of the screen. In addition to the machine centerlines, the acceptable angular tolerance band (represented by an angle bracket) and offset tolerance band (represented by a square bracket) are also displayed in the lower section of the screen.

3-136 Horizontal Alignment

Page 217: 2130 Laser Alignment

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to toggle the machine move sets between the alternate pairs of feet. The Alternate Move key can be used to do the same. Refer to the Horizontal Move Function Keys: Alternate Move section (below) for more information.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the Main screen where the Move Machine step is marked completed and the Sweep Laser Heads step is highlighted.

Horizontal Move Function Keys

Extra FootUse the Extra Foot key to advance to the Extra Foot screen where the vertical and horizontal machine moves for machine foot locations in addition to the ones defined for the job can be calculated. Refer to the Extra Foot Calculation section on page 3-143 for more information. This option is available only when the selected machine move foot pairs are located only on the left machine or the right machine.

Alternate MoveUse the Alternate Move key to toggle the machine move sets between alternate pairs of feet. The Left and Right Arrow keys can be used to do the same.

• If the RPM and all machine dimensions have been entered, then a total of six (6) alternate moves will be available.

• If only the RPM and A, B, C, and F dimensions have been entered, then no alter-nate solutions will be available for the right machine. In this case, a warning mes-sage will be displayed when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to verify whether or not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you answer yes, then you will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.

3-137Laser Address Selection

Page 218: 2130 Laser Alignment

• If only the RPM and D, E, C, and F dimensions have been entered, then no alter-nate solutions will be available for the left machine. In this case, a warning message will be displayed when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to verify whether or not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you answer yes, then you will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.

• If the A dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions that include the A dimension will be available.

• If the E dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions that include the E dimension will be available.

• If the B dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions will be available for the left machine. In this case, a warning message will be displayed when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to verify whether or not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you answer yes, then you will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.

• If the D dimension is the only dimension missing, then no alternate solutions will be available for the right machine. In this case, a warning message will be displayed when this key is selected. The warning message will prompt you to verify whether or not you want to input the missing dimensions required. If you answer yes, then you will be advanced to the Enter Dimensions screen. If you answer no, then the oper-ation is aborted.

From the Enter Dimensions screen, once the required dimensions have been entered, the Enter key will advance you back to the Move Machine screen.

Switch Move Type Use the Switch Move Type key to toggle the displayed move type between Vertical Move, Horizontal Move, and Dual Move (Horizontal and Vertical).

3-138 Horizontal Alignment

Page 219: 2130 Laser Alignment

Data DetailUse the Data Detail key to advance to the tolerance plot screens where graphical representations of the alignment condition can be reviewed. Refer to the Data Detail (Tolerance Plots) section on page 3-162 for more information. In addition, if the data was acquired using the Auto Sweep, Dual Pass, or Manual Sweep methods you can manually condition or edit the sine curve data using the edit data function.

Predict Use the Predict key to advance to the Predict Mode screen where the resulting alignment condition based on the current alignment condition and machine move values you enter can be calculated. Refer to the Predict Mode section on page 3-145 for more information. This option is available only when all dimensions for both machines have been entered.

Live MoveUse the Live Move key to observe machine movement while making machine moves. Refer to the Live Move section on page 3-149 for more information.

3-139Laser Address Selection

Page 220: 2130 Laser Alignment

Dual Move

From the Dual Move screen, you can review the machine moves for both the ver-tical and horizontal directions at the same time.

Dual Move Screen (machine view)

3-140 Horizontal Alignment

Page 221: 2130 Laser Alignment

Dual Move Screen (centerline view)

Show Center Lines keyUse the Show Center Lines key to view the alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine centerlines.

When viewing the alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine centerlines, the amount of movement and direction of movement (represented by arrows) are displayed at the machine feet where machine moves will be made while black squares are displayed at the machine feet where machine moves will not to be made.

Show Machine keyUse the Show Machine key to view the alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine components defined for the job.

3-141Laser Address Selection

Page 222: 2130 Laser Alignment

Live MoveUse the Live Move key to observe machine movement while making machine moves. Refer to the Live Move section on page 3-149 for more information. If the Live Move option on the Alt Main screen is set to Horizontal Only, then the live move can only be performed in the horizontal direction. Refer to the Job Flow sec-tion on page 3-42 for more information.

Enter keyUse the Enter key, once you have viewed both the machine moves, to advance to the Main screen where the Move Machine step is marked completed and the Sweep Laser Heads step is highlighted.

Main screen after viewing machine moves

3-142 Horizontal Alignment

Page 223: 2130 Laser Alignment

Extra Foot Calculation

From the Extra Foot Calculation screen you can calculate the vertical and hori-zontal machine moves for up to four machine foot locations in addtion to those defined for the job. The Extra Foot Calculation screen is reached by pressing the Extra Foot key on the machine move screens. This option is available only when the selected machine move foot pairs are located only on the left machine or the right machine.

Extra Foot Calculation Screen

Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered for the A1-A4 and E1-E4 are -3600 to 3600 inches or -91440 to 91440 mm.

When entering any of these dimensions, they should be measured and extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.

3-143Laser Address Selection

Page 224: 2130 Laser Alignment

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keysUse the Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (highlighted with the red box around it).

Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

When a value has been entered in the Dimensions section of the display, then the vertical (V1-V4) and horizontal (H1-H4) move for those extra feet are calculated and displayed to the right.

The amount of movement will be expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units.

V1-V4If the movement is upward it displays as a positive number. If the movement is downward it displays as a negative.

H1-H4If the movement is to the left (viewed from the outboard end of the right machine looking towards the left machine) it displays as a positive number. If the movement is to the right (viewed from the outboard end of the right machine looking towards the left machine) it displays as a negative number.

Dimension Measurement DescriptionMeasure

to the Nearest

A1-A4

Center of outboard foot of the machine on the left to the center of the extra foot. If the extra foot is located to the right of the outboard foot on the left machine, enter a positive (+) value. If the extra foot is located to the left of the outboard foot on the left machine, enter a negative (–) value.

1/8 inch(3 mm)

E1-E4

Center of inboard foot of the machine on the right to the center of the extra foot. If the extra foot is located to the right of the inboard foot on the right machine, enter a positive (+) value. If the extra foot is located to the left of the inboard foot on the right machine, enter a negative (–) value.

1/8 inch(3 mm)

3-144 Horizontal Alignment

Page 225: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteExtra Foot dimensions and calculations are stored temporarily in ana-lyzer memory.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance back to the move screen this option was accessed from.

Predict Mode

From the Predict Mode screens you can calculate the resulting alignment condi-tion based on the current alignment condition and having moved the machine the amount specified in the program. This is very useful when the machine cannot be dropped any further in the vertical direction or if the machine is bolt bound hori-zontally. The Predict Mode screens are reached by pressing the Predict Mode key on the machine move screens. This option is available only when all dimensions for both machines have been entered.

Selecting the Predict Mode option from the Vertical Move and Dual Move screens displays the Predict Mode Vertical screen. This screen displays the movement calcu-lated by the align program, and required to align the machine vertically. The target indicates how close the machine vertical position is to being in tolerance. The screen also allows entry of alternate machine moves for which the predict mode computes the tolerance values were those moves actually made on the machine.

3-145Laser Address Selection

Page 226: 2130 Laser Alignment

The Predict Mode Vertical screen functions similarly to the Predict Mode Horizontal screen described below.

Predict Mode Horizontal Screen

Selecting the Predict Mode option from the Horizontal Move screen displays the Predict Mode Horizontal screen. This screen displays the movement calculated by the align program to align the machine horizontally. The target indicates how close the machine horizontal position is to being in tolerance.

If a machine cannot be moved the required distance, such as when a foot needs to be lowered more than the amount of shims already under the foot or if the machine is bolt bound, try using different move values in order to find the optimum alignment for the given conditions. The idea is to find a movement solu-tion that may cause the alignment condition to be in the acceptable or even the excellent range.

3-146 Horizontal Alignment

Page 227: 2130 Laser Alignment

The foot pair for which movement is shown corresponds to the foot pair selected on the machine move screen when the Predict Mode option is selected. The amount of movement at the machine feet (expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) which the align program calculates in order to bring the machine into alignment is displayed in the upper section of the screen. In addition to the amount of movement, an arrow representing the direc-tion of movement is also displayed at the machine feet where machine moves are to be made.

NoteYou must return to the machine move screen and select a different foot pair if you wish to see a solution at an alternate foot pair.

Movement in the Vertical DirectionIf the movement is positive (upward) it will be displayed above the machine. If the movement is negative (downward) it will be displayed below the machine.

Movement in the Horizontal DirectionIf the movement is positive (to the left — viewed from the outboard end of the right machine looking towards the left machine) it will be displayed below the machine. If the movement is negative (to the right — viewed from the outboard end of the right machine looking towards the left machine) it will be displayed above the machine.

The bull’s-eye target displayed in the middle of the screen represents the alignment condition with respect to the tolerances defined for the job. If the tolerance condi-tion is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer band will be red. If the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the middle band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the acceptable tol-erance, but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center band (bull’s-eye) will be green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent tolerance, then the center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the foot (highlighted with the red box around it) for which you wish to enter the proposed move value.

3-147Laser Address Selection

Page 228: 2130 Laser Alignment

Once you have selected a foot, enter a number corresponding to the proposed move for that foot. For vertical moves, upward is positive and downward is negative. For horizontal moves, left is positive and right is negative. The range of values that can be entered is -1000 to 1000 mils or -25.4 to 25.4 mm.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the Prediction screen.

Horizontal Prediction Screen

The Prediction screen, allows you to view the estimated alignment condition if the moves you specified were to be performed. The alignment condition is displayed just below the machine graphics. Depending on the tolerance type defined for the job and the analyzer units, alignment angle data will be either in mils/inch or mil-liradian (mrad) while offset data will be either in mils or millimeters (mm).

The bull’s-eye target displayed in the lower section of the screen indicates how close the machine vertical or horizontal positions are to being in tolerance. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

3-148 Horizontal Alignment

Page 229: 2130 Laser Alignment

Prediction Function Keys

Repeat Predict ModeUse the Repeat Predict Mode key to return to the Predict Mode screen. It may be necessary to repeat the process before a suitable solution is found that will bring the alignment condition within tolerance.

Predict VerticalUse the Predict Vertical key to advance to the Predict Mode Vertical screen. This option is available only from the Horizontal Prediction screen.

Predict HorizontalUse the Predict Horizontal key to advance to the Predict Mode Horizontal screen. This option is available only from the Vertical Prediction screen.

Go to Machine MovesUse the Go to Machine Moves key to advance back to the move screen this option was accessed from.

Live Move

The Live Move option allows you to observe machine movement while making machine moves. The Live Move option is initiated by pressing the Live Move key on the machine move screens. If the Live Move option on the Alt Main screen is set to Horizontal Only, the Live Move key is not active on the Vertical Move screen. Refer to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more information.

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

When the Live Move key is pressed, a message will be displayed prompting you to position the laser heads before starting the live move. If you answer yes, then the live move operation begins. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

3-149Laser Address Selection

Page 230: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteIf a live move has been done in say the vertical direction, and fol-lowing this you then go directly to the Horizontal Move screen (or visa versa) and try to start the live move there, a warning message will be displayed to inform you that a live move may have been done since alignment data was last acquired. Once a live move is done in either the vertical or horizontal direction, a second live move should not be done in the perpendicular direction without first acquiring a new set of laser readings. If you answer yes, then you will continue with the live move. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted. This same mes-sage is also displayed on an activated alignment job if a new set of data has not been acquired since the job was activated.

Selecting the Live Move option from the Vertical Move screen displays the Vertical Live Move screen. This screen displays the movement required to align the machine vertically. The target indicates how close the machine vertical position is to being in tolerance.

3-150 Horizontal Alignment

Page 231: 2130 Laser Alignment

The Vertical Live Move screen functions similarly to the Horizontal Live Move screen described below.

Horizontal Live Move Screen

Selecting the Live Move option from the Horizontal Move screen displays the Hor-izontal Live Move screen. This screen displays the movement required to align the machine horizontally. The target indicates how close the machine horizontal posi-tion is to being in tolerance.

The live move can be performed with the laser heads at any rotational position. The average laser head angle position is displayed in the middle of the screen. The back-ground will be white if the laser heads are not within 5° of each other and green when the laser heads are within 5° of each other.

Caution!Do not change the position of the laser heads after the live move has been started. Changing the positions of the laser heads after starting the live move will cause the move to be incorrect.

3-151Laser Address Selection

Page 232: 2130 Laser Alignment

Caution!Do not loosen the machine feet hold down bolts until after the live move has been started. Loosening the hold down bolts prior to starting the live move can cause the move to be incorrect.

The amount of movement at the machine feet (expressed in either mils or millime-ters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed in the upper section of the screen. If the movement is positive (to the left — viewed from the outboard end of the right machine looking towards the left machine) it displays below the machine. If the movement is negative (to the right — viewed from the outboard end of the right machine looking towards the left machine) it displays above the machine. In addition to the amount of movement, an arrow representing the direction of movement is also displayed at the machine feet where machine moves are to be made.

As the machine is moved, the bull’s-eye target displayed in the lower section of the screen provides a continuous update of the alignment condition with respect to teh tolerance values defined for the job. If the tolerance condition is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer band will be red. If the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the middle band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the acceptable tolerance, but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center band (bull’s-eye) will be green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent tolerance, then the center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

When the Enable Alert option is enabled, the analyzer LED will flash during the live move when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values. Increasing and decreasing flash rates indicate when the machine alignment crosses through the acceptable and excellent tolerance condition thresholds described above. The number of flashes and flash rate will be consistent with the audible tone generated when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values. Refer to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more information.

3-152 Horizontal Alignment

Page 233: 2130 Laser Alignment

If the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is enabled and the Enable Alert option is enabled, the audible tone will be generated as described above, but if the Status Beeper option located under the 2130 analyzer’s Home/General Setup screen is disabled and the Enable Alert option is enabled, the audible tone will not be generated as described above. In this case only the analyzer LED will flash as described above.

When the Enable Alert option is disabled, the analyzer LED will not flash and an audible tone will not be generated when the machine alignment condition reaches the target tolerance values.

The alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine components defined for the job is displayed in the upper section of the screen while the align-ment condition of the machine with respect to the machine centerlines (repre-sented by dashed lines) is displayed in the lower section of the screen. In addition to the machine centerlines, the acceptable angular tolerance band (represented by an angle bracket) and offset tolerance band (represented by a square bracket) are also displayed in the lower section of the screen.

Start keyUse the Start key to start the live move after the laser heads are in the chosen rota-tional position. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

3-153Laser Address Selection

Page 234: 2130 Laser Alignment

Left and Right Arrow and Alternate Move keysUse the Left and Right Arrow and Alternate Move keys to toggle the machine move sets between the alternate pairs of feet.

Alignment condition is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance

3-154 Horizontal Alignment

Page 235: 2130 Laser Alignment

Once the live move has been started loosen the machine feet hold down bolts then move the machine(s) until they are within tolerance.

Alignment condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance

3-155Laser Address Selection

Page 236: 2130 Laser Alignment

Alignment condition is less than the acceptable tolerance, but greater than the excellent tolerance

3-156 Horizontal Alignment

Page 237: 2130 Laser Alignment

Alignment condition is less than the excellent tolerance

Stop keyUse the Stop key to stop the live move session once the machine(s) are within tol-erance, and to advance back to the move screen this option was accessed from. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Caution!When the machine(s) are within tolerance, before exiting the live move, tighten the machine hold down bolts. If the machine(s) remain within tolerance when the hold down bolts are tightened, then you can exit the Live Move option.

Caution!Do not use a hammer to move machines. These impacts may move either sensor head, causing improper machine positioning. Emerson recommends that you use jack bolts (permanent or portable).

3-157Laser Address Selection

Page 238: 2130 Laser Alignment

Caution!On completion of a live move, always acquire a new set of alignment data to verify and finalize the machine’s alignment condition.

3-158 Horizontal Alignment

Page 239: 2130 Laser Alignment

Caution!Never rely on a live machine move for the final alignment condition of the machine. Since there is always some variability introduced into the alignment data due to shaft clearances, bearing faults, base deterioration, etc. Refer to the Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

Dual Live Move Screen (machine view)

3-159Laser Address Selection

Page 240: 2130 Laser Alignment

Dual Live Move Screen (centerline view)

Selecting the Live Move option from the Dual Move screen displays the Dual Live Move screen. This screen displays the movement required to align the machine ver-tically and horizontally at the same time.

When viewing the alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine centerlines, the amount of movement and direction of movement (represented by arrows) are displayed at the machine feet where machine moves are to be made while black squares are displayed at the machine feet where machine moves will not to be made.

NoteIf the Live Move option on the Alt Main screen is set to Horizontal Only, then the live move can only be performed in the horizontal direction. Refer to the Job Flow section on page 3-42 for more infor-mation.

3-160 Horizontal Alignment

Page 241: 2130 Laser Alignment

Show Center Lines keyUse the Show Center Lines key to view the alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine centerlines. This key is only active when the Live Move option on the Alt Main screen is set to Vertical and Horizontal.

Show Machine keyUse the Show Machine key to view the alignment condition of the machine with respect to the machine components defined for the job.

3-161Laser Address Selection

Page 242: 2130 Laser Alignment

Data Detail (Tolerance Plots)

From the Data Detail (Tolerance Plot) screens you can review the graphical repre-sentation of the alignment condition. In addition, if the data was acquired using the Auto Sweep, Dual Pass, or Manual Sweep methods you can manually condition or edit the sine curve data using the edit data function. Refer to the Display Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more information. The tolerance plot screens are reached by pressing the Data Detail key on the machine move screens. This option is available only when alignment data is stored on the job.

Quad Tolerance Plot

On the four quadrant tolerance plot screen, if the Tolerance Type is Standard, alignment angle versus offset data is plotted for both the vertical and horizontal directions. If the Tolerance Type is Jackshaft, left machine angular misalignment versus right machine angular misalignment data is plotted. In this plot, the positive and negative values for the reading sets are plotted.

3-162 Horizontal Alignment

Page 243: 2130 Laser Alignment

Dual Tolerance Plot

On the dual tolerance plot screen, the alignment data is plotted similarly to the four quadrant tolerance plot, except in this case the absolute value of each of the read-ings is plotted.

3-163Laser Address Selection

Page 244: 2130 Laser Alignment

Single Tolerance Plot (Vertical)

Single Tolerance Plot (Horizontal)

On the single tolerance plot screens, alignment data is plotted similarly to the dual tolerance plot, except in this case the data plotted is either for the vertical or hori-zontal direction only.

3-164 Horizontal Alignment

Page 245: 2130 Laser Alignment

For all plot types• Alignment reading sets will be plotted on the x-y graph with lines connecting each

of the data points for a given direction. Vertical data points display in blue while hor-izontal data points display in red.

• Depending on the tolerance type defined for the job and the analyzer units, align-ment angle data will be either in mils/inch or milliradian (mrad) while offset data will be either in mils or millimeters (mm).

• The area under the lowest arc is the excellent range. The area under the higher arc and above the lower arc represents the acceptable range. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

• When the cursor is active, the calculated alignment data values for the selected point are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

• The RPM defined for the job is displayed just to the right of the calculated align-ment data values.

Up and Down Arrow keysUse the Up and Down Arrow keys to expand and compress (contract) the Y Axis by a factor of two.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the cursor between the data points.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to return to the screen from which this option was selected.

3-165Laser Address Selection

Page 246: 2130 Laser Alignment

Data Detail (Tolerance Plot) Function Keys

Display Sine FitUse the Display Sine Fit key to advance to the sine fit data plot where you can review and manually condition or edit the sine curve data. This key is only active if the data was acquired using the Auto Sweep, Dual Pass, or Manual Sweep methods. Refer to the Display Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more information.

View DataUse the View Data key to advance to the View Data screen where you can review the alignment data in the traditional cardinal positions (0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°). Refer to the View Data section on page 3-174 for more information.

Full ScreenUse the Full Screen key to display the plot in “full” screen mode. In full screen mode, the soft keys disappear and only function to return the display back to its original size.

Switch Plot TypeUse the Switch Plot Type key to toggle the plot type between the Four Quadrant Tolerance plot, Dual Tolerance plot, Single Vertical Tolerance plot, and Single Horizontal Tolerance plot.

Show AllUse the Show All key to display all readings acquired. This key is only active when more than three readings are stored on the job and only the last three readings acquired are displayed.

Show Last 3Use the Show Last 3 key to display only the last three readings acquired. This key is only active when more than three readings are stored on the job and all readings acquired are displayed.

Expand X Axis Use the Expand X Axis key to expand the X Axis by a factor of two.

Compress X AxisUse the Compress X Axis key to compress (contract) the X Axis by a factor of two.

3-166 Horizontal Alignment

Page 247: 2130 Laser Alignment

Cursor Home Use the Cursor Home key to advance the cursor to the “Home” or newest data point displayed. In this case, this is the last data point acquired.

Clear CursorUse the Clear Cursor key to deactivate (clear) the cursor from the plot. This key is only active when a cursor is active.

Cursor EndUse the Cursor End key to advance the cursor to the “End” or oldest data point dis-played.

3-167Laser Address Selection

Page 248: 2130 Laser Alignment

Display Sine Fit

From the Sine Fit (Sine Curve Data) plot screen you can review and manually con-dition or edit the sine curve data. This screen is reached by pressing the Display Sine Fit key on the tolerance plot screens. This option is available only when the alignment data was acquired using the Auto Sweep, Dual Pass, or Manual Sweep methods.

Sine Curve Data Screen

On the sine curve data plot screen, amplitude versus degree data is plotted on the x-y graph. Amplitude data units will be either in mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. Active (undeleted) data points (displayed as green triangles are included in the fit cal-culation while deleted data points (displayed as red diamonds) are excluded from the fit cal-culation. In addition to the points, the calculated sine curve is displayed.

When a cursor is active, the following alignment data values for the selected point are displayed just below the plot:

3-168 Horizontal Alignment

Page 249: 2130 Laser Alignment

• Point

This variable indicates the number of the selected point.

• Angle

This variable indicates the angular position (in degrees) of the selected point.

• Vert

This variable indicates the actual vertical position (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer units) of the selected point. The background for this variable will be green for an active point and red for a deleted point.

• Est

This variable is the amplitude value of the sine fit curve at the particular angular position.

NoteAlthough up to 180 data points can be acquired, not all the data points are required for the fit calculation. However, a minimum of three points is required to fit the data to the sine curve.

The following calculated sine curve variables are displayed at the bottom of the screen:

• Phase

This variable indicates (in degrees) where the plus zero transition is positioned.

• Offset

This variable indicates (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer units) the cen-terline of the laser travel on the target in the radial direction. The initial position of the laser on the target affects this variable.

• Amplitude

This variable indicates the maximum displacement (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer units) of the sine curve from the offset line.

• Correlation

This variable indicates the confidence factor (shown as a percentage) used to deter-mine the quality of the sine curve data. In other words, it indicates how well the points fit the sine curve.

3-169Laser Address Selection

Page 250: 2130 Laser Alignment

Emerson does not recommend making moves based on sine fit percentages of less than 70%. Although sine fits less than 70% can be used, Emerson recommends another set of readings be made to try and improve the accuracy. Sine fits above 90% provide the highest repeatability.

Calculated Sine Curve Diagram

Up and Down Arrow keysUse the Up and Down Arrow keys to expand and compress (contract) the Y Axis by a factor of two.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the cursor between the data points.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to return to the screen from which this option was selected.

3-170 Horizontal Alignment

Page 251: 2130 Laser Alignment

Sine Curve ShapeThe sine curve for each machine is used to determine the alignment condition of the machines and the quality of the acquired data. The lower the curve fit per-centage is during an alignment job the more of a problem and difficult, if not impossible, it can become to complete the alignment job. When a low curve fit per-centage occurs, the process of determining its cause needs to begin. The best place to start is to look at the sine fit curve.

If the data points appear grouped in straight horizontal rows configured in a stair step pattern the acquired data is possibly bad. Make sure that both laser heads are mounted properly on the shaft of each machine, check the coupling, and acquire new data. When the only place to mount the laser heads is on a flexible type cou-pling, make sure the laser heads are mounted on sections of the coupling that flex independently of each other. If the coupling is a rigid coupling, whether you mount the laser heads on the shafts or the coupling, the coupling must be removed or broken loose.

If the machines are connected by a jackshaft, spool, or spacer coupling do not mount the laser heads on the center section of the coupling. Mounting the laser heads on the same section of a flexible coupling, on machines connected by a rigid coupling, or on the center section of a jackshaft is like mounting the laser heads on a straight piece of rigid pipe. In this case, the stair step pattern is the result of no mis-alignment being present. A small amount of sag in the pipe and a low variability level due to something other than misalignment may appear as misalignment. For this reason, placing the laser heads on a straight piece of rigid pipe to check them is not recommended.

If the laser heads are mounted correctly and the data still appears grouped in the stair step pattern, check the status of the laser heads for a possible hardware problem.

Although the 8215/8225 laser fixtures are designed to be rotated a full revolution in two seconds, make sure to use a smooth, uniform acceleration and deceleration during the rotation for accurate, reliable, and repeatable data. Also, make sure no obstacles are blocking the laser beam during the rotation and make sure both beams remain in the targets for at least 45° of the rotation of the laser heads. Emerson recommends you sweep at least 90°; however accuracy still may be reduced even at 90°.

If the laser heads are being swept correctly check the status of the laser heads for a possible hardware problem.

3-171Laser Address Selection

Page 252: 2130 Laser Alignment

If enough data points were acquired, but they are displayed in a randomly scattered pattern across the screen the measured misalignment amplitudes will decrease while the ratio of noise to the signal increases. In this case, problems (e.g. a bearing fault, a loose coupling, a rub, etc.) can distort the sine fit curve. This is the most common reason for unfit sine fit curves. When this occurs, check the amplitudes of each curve and edit the unfit sine fit curve to make it fit or change to the four point method and acquire new data.

The peak-peak amplitudes of each sine fit curve can be used to determine whether the laser heads are mounted on the shafts properly or if the machines are aligned. If the amplitudes of both machines are around two mils or less and three or more data points were acquired in a sweep arc of 45° or more the machines might pos-sibly be aligned within tolerance. When this condition exists, the accuracy of any further adjustments may be reduced using the available data.

If the peak-peak amplitudes of the sine fit curves are too high, check the sine fit curve for data points which might lie far away from the sine fit curve and either edit the sine fit and remove the measurement points which might lie far away from the curve or change to a four point method and acquire new data. Another possible reason for this condition could be the presence of too much looseness in the system. To verify this condition, it will be necessary to check the system for looseness and then repeat the measurement.

Display Sine Fit Function Keys

Delete/Undelete PointUse the Delete/Undelete Point key to delete or undelete the selected point. The point is not actually deleted from the data set, but it is marked (or unmarked) so that it is not used when the program fits a sine wave to the data points. A deleted point is not used in the fit calculation. Whenever points are deleted or undeleted the fit is recalculated. A minimum of three points is required for the fit calculation.

Full ScreenUse the Full Screen key to display the plot in “full” screen mode. In full screen mode, the soft keys disappear and only function to return the display back to its original size.

3-172 Horizontal Alignment

Page 253: 2130 Laser Alignment

Chng Active PlotUse the Chng Active Plot key to change the active plot (marked with a red box around it). When most of the functions, available on this screen, are selected they are applied to the active plot.

Switch Plot TypeUse the Switch Plot Type key to toggle the plot type between the left and right laser head data plots together, the left laser head data plot only, or the right laser head data plot only.

Undelete All Points Use the Undelete All Points key to undelete all data points and redo the calcula-tions for the machine. This will cause all data points to be used in the curve fit cal-culations.

Expand X Axis Use the Expand X Axis key to expand the X Axis by a factor of two.

Compress X AxisUse the Compress X Axis key to compress (contract) the X Axis by a factor of two.

Cursor Home Use the Cursor Home key to advance the cursor to the “Home” or lowest angle value.

Clear CursorUse the Clear Cursor key to deactivate (clear) the cursor from the plot.

Cursor EndUse the Cursor End key to advance the cursor to the “End” or highest angle value.

3-173Laser Address Selection

Page 254: 2130 Laser Alignment

View Data

From the View Data screen you can review the alignment data in the traditional car-dinal positions (0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°). The View Data screen is reached by pressing the View Data key on the tolerance plot screens.

View Data Screen

This data cannot be edited and is simply provided for the convenience of those who are accustomed to recording the data in this manner or who wish to use this data to perform a graphical solution on paper.

Zero Top Reading KeyUse the Zero Top Reading key, to zero the top reading. If the top reading for both machines is zero (such as the case would be if the saved reading set was the aver-aged result from multiple acquisitions) this key is not available.

3-174 Horizontal Alignment

Page 255: 2130 Laser Alignment

Display Actual Data keyUse the Display Actual Data key, to see the “raw data,” (the position of the beam on each target). If the top reading for both machines is zero (such as the case would be if the saved reading set was the averaged result from multiple acquisitions) this key is not available.

Enter keyUse the Enter key, to return to the tolerance plot screens.

C-face Alignment

After alignment data is acquired, the C-face option can be used to display align-ment data for machines in which the machine moves are done on a machine with a circular flange with a basic four bolt pattern. If the setup for a rectangular or custom flange pattern is required you will need to change the job to a Vertical align-ment job. Refer to the Vertical Alignment section on page 4-1 for more informa-tion.

3-175Laser Address Selection

Page 256: 2130 Laser Alignment

This option is available by selecting the Align C-face Machine option after viewing the tolerance plot(s) for a Quick Spec job. Refer to the Quick Spec section on page 3-53 for more information.

C-Face setup screen

The C-face Setup screen allows you to enter the dimensions for the flange location where moves are to be made.

NoteThis section assumes that the fixtures are set up to the point that the laser heads are mounted.

Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. All dimensions must be entered before continuing. The range of values that can be entered for the A dimension is -3600 to 3600 inches or -91440 to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the Y dimension is 1.0 to 1000 inches or 25.4 to 25400 mm. The Y Dimension default is 1 inch (25.4 mm).

3-176 Horizontal Alignment

Page 257: 2130 Laser Alignment

When entering any of the machine dimensions, the flange dimensions should be measured and extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keysUse the Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (highlighted with the red box around it).

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the C-face Solution screen.

Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

3-177Laser Address Selection

Page 258: 2130 Laser Alignment

C-face Solution Screen

The C-face Solution screen allows you to view the alignment condition and machine moves for the machine being aligned.

Dimension Measurement DescriptionMeasure

to the Nearest

ACenter of flange to be moved to the laser head face on the upper machine. To enter a measurement for a flange that falls inside the laser face, place a negative sign (–) in front of it.

1/8 inch(3 mm)

Y The bolt pattern diameter.1/8 inch(3 mm)

3-178 Horizontal Alignment

Page 259: 2130 Laser Alignment

The alignment condition is displayed just below the machine graphics. Depending on the analyzer units, since the tolerance type can only be Standard when per-forming a C-face alignment the alignment angle data displayed will be in mils/inch or milliradian (mrad) while offset data displayed will be in mils or millimeters (mm).

The bull’s-eye target displayed just below the coupling represents the alignment condition with respect to the tolerances defined for the job. If the tolerance condi-tion is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer band will be red. If the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the middle band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the acceptable tol-erance, but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center band (bull’s-eye) will be green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent tolerance, then the center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

The amount of movement required to align the machine (expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed just to the right of the flange. A graphical representation of the movement (represented by the dual arrows) is displayed in the center of the flange.

Shim values are equivalent to raising the machine. In this case, all shim values will be positive. When correcting angular misalignment keep the flange offset move-ment to a minimum. After shimming is complete, be sure to re-tighten bolts and take a new set of readings.

C-face Setup keyUse the C-face Setup key to return to the C-face Setup screen.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the Main screen.

3-179Laser Address Selection

Page 260: 2130 Laser Alignment

Notes

From the Notes screen notes can be assigned to the current job. In addition to pre-defined notes user defined notes can also be created and assigned to the current job from under this option. The Notes screen is reached by pressing the Notes key on the Alt Main screen.

Defined Notes Screen

Except for the difference in the groups of predefined notes available, this option functions exactly as it does in the existing 2130 analyzer programs.

Notes Function Keys

Next Group Use the Next Group key to display the next group of predefined notes.

3-180 Horizontal Alignment

Page 261: 2130 Laser Alignment

User Defined NotesUse the User Defined Notes key to advance to the User Defined Notes screen where you can then select a user defined note from that list. If you have no user defined notes, you can use this screen in order to create them. Select Create User Note, type in the note (32 characters maximum), and then press the Enter key to create the note and add it to the list. You are allowed a maximum of 25 user defined notes. If the maximum of 25 stored notes is reached, the analyzer forces you to delete a note before you can add a new note.

User Defined Notes Screen

3-181Laser Address Selection

Page 262: 2130 Laser Alignment

Add to Job Use the Add to Job key to add the highlighted note to the job. Notes allow you to record specific comments about the equipment that you might not be able to remember later. You can record observations about the equipment that you are monitoring. Once you have added the note to the job, it is saved and dumped into your UltraMgr database with the job. You can add up to 40 predefined and user defined notes to any 2130 analyzer alignment job. If the maximum of 40 stored notes is reached, the analyzer forces you to delete a note before you can add a new note.

Notes Screen with Assigned Notes

Remove from JobUse the Remove from Job key to remove the highlighted note from the assigned notes list. When this option is selected, the highlighted note is removed without any warning.

Clear All NotesUse the Clear All Notes key to clear all the notes you have assigned to the job. When this option is selected, notes are cleared without any warning.

3-182 Horizontal Alignment

Page 263: 2130 Laser Alignment

Prev Group Use the Prev Group key to display the previous group of predefined notes.

Defined Notes Use the Defined Notes key to advance to the predefined Notes screen where you can then select a predefined note from that list. Some predefined notes will use the machine names defined for the job. For example, if “Fixed” and “Move” were selected to be the machines names for the job, the Soft Foot related notes would contain these machine names (as shown above in the first Notes screen).

Delete User Note Use the Delete User Note key to delete the highlighted note from the User Defined Notes list. Before any note is deleted, a warning message will be displayed asking you if this is truly the operation to be performed. If you answer yes, then the note will be deleted from the list. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

Defined and User Defined Notes Up and Down Arrows Use the Defined and User Defined Notes Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of predefined and user defined notes.

Assigned Notes Up and Down ArrowsUse the Assigned Notes Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of notes assigned to the job.

NotePredefined notes can not be modified and user defined notes stay stored in memory until deleted. Notes stored in analyzer memory are not removed when alignment jobs are deleted.

NoteWhenever a note is added or removed from a job, the number of notes attached to the job, displayed in the upper section of the main screen, is updated.

3-183Laser Address Selection

Page 264: 2130 Laser Alignment

Transferring Alignment Job Data and Tolerances

The option to transfer alignment jobs and tolerances is only available in the Advanced Laser Align program. Alignment jobs can be transferred to and from the Personal Computer (PC) while alignment tolerances can only be transferred from the PC to the analyzer.

NoteThe option to transfer alignment jobs and tolerances is not available in the Basic Laser Align program.

Communications between the analyzer and host computer (PC) or network can be achieved through an Ethernet card and cable, a USB cable, or a CSI serial commu-nications cable. The fastest way of transferring data is via the Ethernet connection and the slowest way is via the CSI serial communications cable. The most common and easiest connection however is via the USB.

Connection to a host computer or network requires the Advanced Laser Align pro-gram’s Connect for Transfer option and the Machinery Health Manager’s RBMcom program. When transferring alignment jobs and tolerances between the PC and analyzer, both the PC and the analyzer can act as either the master or slave. This means either one can control the transaction between the two.

3-184 Horizontal Alignment

Page 265: 2130 Laser Alignment

Connect for TransferThe Connect for Transfer option is available from the Job Manager screen.

PC Communications Screen

When the Connect for Transfer option is selected the PC Communications screen is displayed. From this screen you can select between loading alignment jobs from the PC, dumping alignment jobs to the PC, and loading an alignment tolerance table from the PC.

NoteMachinery Health Manager must have the alignment technology enabled in order to transfer alignment jobs and tolerances between the PC and analyzer. If this technology isn’t enabled, a warning mes-sage will be displayed when the Connect for Transfer option is selected.

3-185Laser Address Selection

Page 266: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteRBMcom must be launched before the Connect for Transfer option is selected. If it hasn’t been launched, a warning message displays when the Connect for Transfer option is selected.

Set Storage Location, Load Jobs, and Dump Data keysRefer to the RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer section of the Model 2130 analyzer Machinery Analyzer User’s Guide (P/N 97017) and Machinery Health Manager’s RBMcom Help file for information about con-necting to a host computer or network in order to set the storage location, to load alignment jobs, or dump alignment jobs since these options function similarly for all Model 2130 programs.

3-186 Horizontal Alignment

Page 267: 2130 Laser Alignment

Load Tolerance Table keyUse the Load Tolerance Table key to load an alignment tolerance table from the PC into the analyzer without loading an alignment job. The alignment tolerance table contains the tolerance values for standard, jackshaft, and vertical alignment jobs, as well as soft foot and FDI tolerance values. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information about tolerances.

Select Database Screen

When the Load Tolerance Table option is selected the Select Database screen is dis-played. From this screen you can select the Machinery Health Manager database from which the alignment tolerance table is to be loaded.

3-187Laser Address Selection

Page 268: 2130 Laser Alignment

Load Tolerance Table keyUse the Load Tolerance Table key to load the default tolerance table for the selected (highlighted) database into the analyzer. After the new set of alignment tolerance values are loaded into the analyzer's memory, any new job created from that point will use the new set of alignment tolerance values. Any job stored in ana-lyzer memory prior to loading the new set of alignment tolerance values into active memory will use the alignment tolerance value for the setup it was originally stored with. If the job stored in analyzer memory prior to loading the new set of alignment tolerance values into active memory is modified in a way that requires a new align-ment tolerance value (e.g. changing the RPM, or changing the coupling tolerance type from Jackshaft to Standard) the new alignment tolerance value will come from the new set of alignment tolerance values loaded into active memory.

NoteIn Machinery Health Manager, the same recommended alignment tolerance values used as defaults in the analyzer are used as the data-base's default alignment tolerance values until changed by the user. The Load Defaults option on the Alt Main screen can be used to delete any alignment tolerance values loaded into the analyzer from the PC. In this case, the default alignment tolerance values will be reactivated.

Database Up and Down Arrows Use the Database Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll through the list of databases.

3-188 Horizontal Alignment

Page 269: 2130 Laser Alignment

RBMcomSince most of the options available in RBMcom function similarly for all Model 2130 analyzer programs refer to the RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer section of the Model 2130 Machinery Analyzer User’s Guide (P/N 97017) and Machinery Health Manager’s RBMcom Help file for additional infor-mation.

RBMcom

3-189Laser Address Selection

Page 270: 2130 Laser Alignment

Before any alignment jobs and the alignment tolerance table option will show up in the tree, the Show Alignment Jobs option under the User Preferences General tab must be selected (checked).

User Preferences

NoteThe analyzer must have the Advanced Laser Align program enabled in order to transfer alignment jobs and tolerances between the PC and analyzer. If this program isn’t enabled, a warning message will be displayed when you try to transfer the job to the analyzer.

NoteThe analyzer must be connected to RBMcom in order to transfer alignment jobs and tolerances between the PC and analyzer. If it isn’t connected, you will not be able to transfer alignment jobs and toler-ances.

3-190 Horizontal Alignment

Page 271: 2130 Laser Alignment

The options for transferring alignment jobs from the analyzer to the computer are handled in the same manner supported for other transferable entities (e.g. routes and jobs). That includes the ability to transfer jobs via drag and drop or using the “Data Dump” button option.

• Using the mouse, left-click on the job (located on the right-side window pane) which you want to transfer from the analyzer to the computer database or folder. Once the job has been selected (highlighted) use the Data Dump button to transfer the selected job.

• Using the mouse, left-click and hold on the job on the right-side window pane you want to transfer from the analyzer to the computer database or folder. Then while still holding, drag the selected job from the right-side window pane to the left-side window pane.

If more than one database is available in RBMcom, a database list dialog box dis-plays prompting for a selection of the database to which the jobs are to be trans-ferred. When this occurs, select the database you want to transfer the job to.

If a job with the exact same date and time exists in the storage location (unassigned or assigned), the job will be stored as a new job as long as the job number is dif-ferent. If a job with the same job number, but a different date time exists in the storage location, the job will be stored as a new job. If a job with the exact same date and job number exists, then an error will be displayed and the job will not be uploaded.

Jobs that originate in the analyzer will be stored in the unassigned area of the data-base. A job that originate from a download of an existing job from a database will retain its source location so when it is transferred back to the computer, it will be saved directly under the same equipment it originated from. If the equipment indi-cated can not be found in the database (e.g. the equipment was deleted or a dif-ferent database has been chosen), then you will receive a warning and the job will be stored in the unassigned area of the database.

NoteModifications in the analyzer to the coupling type, machine ID or Description, machine dimensions between the feet, the machine view or configuration, RPM or station information, will cause the 2130 Laser Alignment program to set the job type to “unassigned”.

3-191Laser Address Selection

Page 272: 2130 Laser Alignment

The options for transferring alignment jobs and the alignment tolerance table to the analyzer from the computer are done in the same manner supported for other transferable entities (e.g. routes and jobs). That includes the ability to transfer jobs and the alignment tolerance table via drag and drop or using the “Data Load” button option.

• Using the mouse, left-click on the job located on the left-side window pane you want to transfer to the analyzer from the computer database or folder. Once the job has been selected (highlighted) use the Data Load button to transfer the selected job.

• Using the mouse, left-click and hold on the job on the left-side window pane which you want to transfer to the analyzer from the computer database or folder. Then while still holding, drag the selected job from the left-side window pane to the right-side window pane.

To load a particular alignment tolerance table into the analyzer from the computer, select (highlight) the alignment tolerance table option for the database from which you want to transfer the table.

NoteThe alignment tolerances will be selectable at the database level in the left pane database view. The tolerances will be displayed as a set con-taining the defined default tolerance settings for all tolerance types supported.

After the new set of alignment tolerance values are loaded into the analyzer's memory, any new job created from that point will use the new set of alignment tol-erance values. Any job stored in analyzer memory prior to loading the new set of alignment tolerance values into active memory will use the alignment tolerance value for the setup it was originally stored with. If the job stored in analyzer memory prior to loading the new set of alignment tolerance values into active memory is modified in a way that requires a new alignment tolerance value (e.g. changing the RPM, or changing the coupling tolerance type from Jackshaft to Standard) the new alignment tolerance value will come from the new set of alignment tolerance values loaded into active memory. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information about tolerances.

3-192 Horizontal Alignment

Page 273: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteIn Machinery Health Manager, the same recommended alignment tolerance values used as defaults in the analyzer are used as the data-base's default alignment tolerance values until changed by the user. The Load Defaults option on the Alt Main screen can be used to delete any alignment tolerance values loaded into the analyzer from the PC. In this case, the default alignment tolerance values will be reactivated.

NoteBefore any jobs are transferred, a confirmation message will be dis-played asking you to verify the location where the selected jobs are to be transferred to. If you answer yes, then the selected jobs and any data stored on these jobs will be transferred to the selected database. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted.

NotePress and hold the Shift and Control keys on the computer keyboard to select several jobs at once for transfer.

Tolerances

The amount of offset and angular misalignment displayed is based on the last full set of alignment readings. All shaft misalignment is a combination of offset and angular misalignment (see “Alignment Application Notes” on page A-3). This screen breaks down the misalignment into each component. The amount of each type of misalignment is shown for both the horizontal and vertical directions (for horizontal machines). These values are only used for tolerances therefore, only absolute values are used (no negative signs).

3-193Laser Address Selection

Page 274: 2130 Laser Alignment

UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align Overview

The figure below illustrates how jobs can be moved in and out of various areas of UltraMgr’s database and the analyzer. Definitions of the job types follow.

UltraMgr/Model 2130 analyzer Overview

NoteThis manual uses the terms “Station” and “Machine.” In UltraMgr and in the 2130 Laser Align program, “Station” is referred to as “Area” and “Machine” is referred to as “Equipment” - unless rede-fined by the user.

UltraMgr DatabaseAssigned Job(s) Area

Station:

Machine:Station:Machine:

Unassigned Job(s) Area

003 Fan004 Turbine

UltraMgr (PC) - (Master/Slave)

Stored Job(s)Area

Current JobArea

Store

Jobs are storedautomatically

Activate

Analyzer - (Slave/Master)

002 Pump

001 Motor

*One jobat a time

001 Motor

Load

Dump

Load

Dump

3-194 Horizontal Alignment

Page 275: 2130 Laser Alignment

Definitions of the four job types illustrated in the UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align figure are:

• Assigned jobs — jobs that have been assigned to a machine.

• Unassigned jobs — jobs that have been moved from the Stored Jobs area of the analyzer into the UltraMgr database but have not been assigned to a machine. Using UltraMgr, you can also change a job from Assigned to Unas-signed status.

• Stored jobs — located in the Stored Jobs area of the analyzer. Current jobs that are saved become stored jobs and are placed in the Stored Jobs area; also, all jobs that are loaded from the UltraMgr database are placed in this area and become stored jobs.

• Current job — job currently displayed in the working area (only one job can be displayed at a time).

Case Studies

The following cases may help you to understand how jobs move around in the analyzer and back and forth to UltraMgr.

When beginning a job (in the Current Job location), there are normally two choices: start from ground zero and create, configure, and name an entirely new job or, (if available) activate a job from the Stored Job(s) area.

Case 1If you create and configure an entirely new job in the analyzer’s Current Job area and you want to keep it, (using the RBMcom program on a PC), dump it to the Unassigned Area or directly to a machine and station of UltraMgr.

Dumping the job directly to a machine and station fully integrates the job infor-mation into the UltraMgr database. If you do not want to assign the job to a machine and station, you can leave it in the Unassigned Area, or you can unas-sign it from the machine and station where it was dumped.

In either case, use RBMcom to load the job back into the analyzer and from that point, you can activate it into the Current Job area where you have full editing capabilities.

3-195UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align Overview

Page 276: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteYou may not be able to edit all fields, depending on the state of the job.

Case 2Begin with an activated job from the Stored Job area. If you change a job in the Current Job area, that change affects the job in the stored job area.

Case 3This case is referred to as job “cloning” and provides optimum use of the entire system, including UltraMgr.

Load an old job performed on the same machine into the analyzer and use it as a template. The old job contains information on job setup, and concerns or observations (notes). Review this information before clearing old information.

Edit the job setup and then take your first set of new readings, if desired.

With UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align, you can;

• Save time by using a previous job setup.• See problems and concerns documented on previous jobs.• New data automatically dumps to the proper location.

This is because jobs that are loaded from the Assigned area of UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align already have station and machine assignments.

Both the UltraMgr PC and the Analyzer can act as the master or the slave. This means that both can control transactions between the UltraMgr PC and the Ana-lyzer. Refer to the Transferring Alignment Job Data and Tolerances section on page 3-184 for more information about communications with the Analyzer.

Also, when you are using UltraMgr, you need to consider what actions are necessary after jobs have been created or changed (in the analyzer). As mentioned previously, actual Station and Machine assignments are made from UltraMgr.

The following table (next page) illustrates how changes to the various parameters affect the job type. Although job type is a software term, the job type determines where the job will be dumped to within the alignment database (to a Machine loca-tion or to the Unassigned area).

3-196 Horizontal Alignment

Page 277: 2130 Laser Alignment

Modified Jobs — This job type is assigned to a particular machine within UltraMgr. If a change(s) is made to a job that causes it to become Modified, it will still retain its Station and Machine assignments in UltraMgr.

Modifications to

these fields

change the Job Type to

Unassigned Modified

Alignment Data X

Alignment Method X

Coupling X

Mach Desc X

Mach ID X

Machine Dimension: A & E (between feet)

X

Machine Dimension: B, C, D, & F X

Machine View (also called machine configuration)

X

Notes X

RPM X

Station X

Thermal Growth X

User Initials X

Foot Pre-check X

Laser Configuration X

3-197UltraMgr/2130 Laser Align Overview

Page 278: 2130 Laser Alignment

Unassigned Jobs — If you create a new job or make change(s) to an existing job that causes it to be Unassigned, when dumped, it will be placed in the Unassigned Area of the alignment database. From there, you can use UltraMgr to assign it to a machine within the database.

NoteIf, for some reason, you do not want to assign a job to the database, you always have the option of leaving it in the Unassigned Area. UltraMgr allows you to Load and Dump these jobs to the analyzer the same way assigned jobs are handled.

3-198 Horizontal Alignment

Page 279: 2130 Laser Alignment

UltraMgr

UltraMgr is a versatile, PC-based, database software package that is used to manage corrective technologies data.

The storage of alignment information in a database provides many advantages which include:

• The ability to quickly retrieve and review the alignment status of all equip-ment in an entire plant to help plan the maintenance priorities and sched-uling.

• The ability to quickly retrieve and review the alignment history of a partic-ular technician to determine if more training is needed.

• The ability to quickly retrieve and review the alignment history of a partic-ular piece of equipment to determine if the machine is going out of align-ment too frequently.

• The ability to use previously entered and stored machine-specific data and setup information in the present alignment (on the same machine) thereby greatly reducing setup time.

• The ability to use previously entered and stored machine-specific data and setup information in the present alignment (on a similar machine), thus requiring only minor changes in the field.

• The ability to recall the complete alignment job previously performed on the present machine (including notes) to see peculiarities that might affect alignment. Knowing about previous problems will reduce time spent tack-ling the same concerns. Also, the name of the technician that performed the alignment previously is available in case there are any questions.

UltraMgr can be used as a standalone program or in conjunction with CSI’s AMS™ Suite: Machinery Health™ Manager. The maximum benefits of UltraMgr are obtained when used with Machinery Health Manager because you can quickly switch from alignment history to examine vibration data for machines under inves-tigation.

3-199UltraMgr

Page 280: 2130 Laser Alignment

UltraMgr Software and Firmware Prerequisites

NoteYour AMS™ Suite: Machinery Health™ Manager software and Model 2130 RBMCONSULTANT PRO must have compatible software.

RequirementsModel 2130 RBMCONSULTANT PRO firmware version v.6.3.8.0 or later.

The following, 4.90 or later, AMS™ Suite: Machinery Health™ Manager files - dated 08/08/2005 or later:

• RBMcom.exe

• RBMcomSr.exe

• XFrAlg.dll

• UltraAlg.exe

UltraMgr requires some planning and setup before jobs can be down-loaded into this alignment program. Refer to the appropriate UltraMgr user’s manual for more information on communicating with the PC.

The DOS version and earlier Windows versions of the UltraMgr software will not work with the 2130 Laser Align program.

3-200 Horizontal Alignment

Page 281: 2130 Laser Alignment

Tolerances

The amount of offset and angular misalignment displayed is based upon the last full set of alignment readings. All shaft misalignment is a combination of offset and angular misalignment (See “Alignment Application Notes” on page A-3.). This screen breaks down the misalignment into each component. The amount of each type of misalignment is shown for both the horizontal and vertical direc-tions (for horizontal machines). These values are only used for tolerances there-fore, only absolute values are used (no negative signs).

3-201UltraMgr

Page 282: 2130 Laser Alignment

StandardThe combination of offset and angle is a direct indication of the alignment condi-tion. Optimum alignment occurs when offset and angle are zero. In most cases, that degree of accuracy is not practical. For that reason, tolerances are used to set an achievable goal. Emerson’s recommended tolerances (referenced to RPMs) are listed in the table below.

English Data Units

Speed(RPM)

Excellent Acceptable

Offset (mils)

Angle (mils/inch)

Offset

(mils)

Angle(mils/inch)

< 500 5.0 1.5 6.0 2.0

501 - 1250 4.0 1.0 5.0 1.5

1251 - 2000

3.0 0.5 4.0 1.0

2001 - 3500

2.0 0.3 3.0 0.5

3501 - 7000

1.0 0.25 2.0 0.3

> 7000 .5 0.2 1.0 0.25

3-202 Horizontal Alignment

Page 283: 2130 Laser Alignment

Metric Data Units

Values in the table are assumed to be pure offset or pure angle. However, in most cases, you will have a combination of the two and tolerances should account for this combination.

For example, for an 1800 RPM machine that has 3.5 mils (0.09mm) of pure offset misalignment, the alignment is in the acceptable range. Or, if it has 0.80 mils/inch (0.8mrad) of pure angular misalignment, the alignment is acceptable. However, if the remaining misalignment is a combination of 3.5 mils offset and 0.80 mils/inch angular, the misalignment is not as good, and should be considered out-of-toler-ance.

Plotting the condition as a single point on an X-Y graph provides a true indication of the alignment status.

The offset and angle information is intended to be used for alignment tolerance only (to determine how close to tolerance the alignment is based upon the last set of alignment readings); do not use these data to align the machines. For this reason, offset and angle are always displayed as positive numbers.

Speed(RPM)

Excellent Acceptable

Offset (mm)

Angle (mrad)

Offset

(mm)

Angle(mrad)

< 500 0.13 1.5 0.15 2.0

501 - 1250 0.1 1.0 0.13 1.5

1251 - 2000

0.08 0.5 0.1 1.0

2001 - 3500

0.05 0.3 0.08 0.5

3501 - 7000

0.03 0.25 0.05 0.3

> 7000 0.01 0.2 0.03 0.25

3-203UltraMgr

Page 284: 2130 Laser Alignment

The curves at the lower left are the tolerances to shoot for. Depending on RPM, they can be modified in UltraMgr and then transferred to the analyzer. See “UltraMgr” on page 3-199 for more information.

The alignment condition (with respect to the tolerances) can be monitored by observing the tolerance target during the live move. A green bull’s-eye means you are within the acceptable tolerance range. A yellow middle band means you are 1x - 2x the acceptable tolerance. A red outside band means you are greater than 2x the acceptable tolerance. A green bull’s-eye with a star means you are within the excel-lent tolerance range.

1

Tolerance Example

Tolerance Chart (200 to 3500 RPM)

3-204 Horizontal Alignment

Page 285: 2130 Laser Alignment

The chart above shows the Angle and Offset for a machine that operates at 2000 — 3500 RPM plotted together. A pure angle reading of 0.45 mils/inch (0.44 mrad) and a pure Offset reading of 2.5 mils (0.06 mm) are marked by the arrows. These readings are clearly in the acceptable range when looked at individually. However, look what happens when these two “acceptable” reading are plotted together. The two lines connect outside the acceptable range. This illustrates the importance of looking at the Offset and Angle together when establishing specified tolerances.

Jackshaft One of the biggest advantages in using a laser system is the ability to align over long distances (> 20 inches or 508 mm). The further apart the sensor heads are mounted, the less practical it is to use the Offset and Angle Tolerances. In those cases, the Jackshaft Tolerances should be used. This method measures the two angles (α and ß) as shown in the figure below. The combination of these two angles are laid out on a graph similar to the offset and angle graphic. When the angles are within tolerance, the cursor will be in the Excellent or Acceptable range.

2

3-205UltraMgr

Page 286: 2130 Laser Alignment

Emerson’s recommended tolerances are listed in the following table.

Speed(RPM)

Excellent Acceptable

Angle (mils/inch or

mrad)

Angle(mils/inch or

mrad)

< 500 1.0 2.0

501 - 1250 0.9 1.8

1251 - 2000 0.8 1.6

2001 - 3500 0.6 1.2

3501 - 7000 0.4 0.6

> 7000 0.2 0.3

3-206 Horizontal Alignment

Page 287: 2130 Laser Alignment

Chapter 4

Vertical Alignment

The vertical alignment feature of the Advanced Laser Align application is used to collect and display alignment data for machines in which the machine moves are done at the machine flange (e.g. C-face mounted motors). These consist of one machine component mounted on another, bolted together at a flange. A typical system is illustrated below.

4-1

Page 288: 2130 Laser Alignment

Measurements should be taken with the laser system set up across the coupling to determine the offset and angle between the two shafts. Correct the angle by shim-ming in the vertical direction. The offset is corrected by sliding the machine at the flange.

Mounting FixturesMount the fixtures as pictured in the figure below. It does not matter which head is on top; this will be configured in the analyzer. For applications with tight mounting requirements, use thin brackets (P/N 8AA54 or 8AA55). RF or direct connect data communication to the analyzer can be used.

NoteBecause of the orientation of the laser heads gravity is not working on the sensitive axis. Therefore, the angle sensors cannot measure the rotational position.

4-2 Vertical Alignment

Page 289: 2130 Laser Alignment

Help

Depending on where you are within the program, an alignment helper may be available at the bottom of the screen to provide you with a brief explanation of the highlighted step or screen. In addition to the alignment helper, a more detailed explanation of the highlighted step is available for the highlighted step by pressing the 2130 Help key once and for the screen by pressing 2130 Help key twice. If fur-ther help is required, refer to the appropriate section(s) in this manual.

Basic Vertical Alignment Steps

Three basic steps are required to complete an alignment job.

1 Define the alignment job• Setup the job parameters.

• Enter machine dimensions.

2 Acquire alignment data• Acquire alignment data to determine the alignment condition of the

machine.

3 Review alignment results• Review machine moves.

• Move the machine, if necessary.

4-3

Page 290: 2130 Laser Alignment

Vertical Main Screen

The vertical main Laser Align Application screen (sometimes referred to as the Main Menu) lets you monitor your progress throughout the alignment job. When a vertical alignment job is active, the Main screen will look as shown below.

Vertical Main screen at job start

The application defaults to a predefined setup when a new job is created. The type of job, Job ID, Equipment ID, alignment method, number of machine moves, and number of notes attached to the job are displayed in the upper portion of the main screen.

NoteUnless otherwise noted, any defaults listed are displayed only at first. Once a field is modified from the default, the program uses the latest entry for that field.

4-4 Vertical Alignment

Page 291: 2130 Laser Alignment

The steps required to perform an alignment are displayed in the center portion of the main screen. The 2130 Laser Align program leads you through each step of a routine alignment procedure starting with the Enter Dimensions selection at the Main screen. Once an alignment job has started the next uncompleted step in the recommended procedure is highlighted.

An [X] signifies a completed step. As you complete steps, the next recommended step is highlighted. Initially, the Move Machine step is displayed, but grayed out until you’ve completed the first two required steps which are critical to the align-ment job.

Up and Down Arrow keysUse the Up and Down Arrow keys to highlight each feature. If you select an inactive step, a popup message reminds you that the selected step is inactive due to missing information.

Three Step Alignment

To simulate the basic steps required to complete a vertical alignment job, the 2130 Laser Align main screen is set up to allow an alignment job to be performed using the following three steps:

1 Enter Dimensions• Enter machine dimensions.

2 Sweep Laser Heads• Acquire alignment data to determine the alignment condition of the

machine.

3 Move Machine• Review angular moves.

• Review offset moves.

• Perform a live move and move machine.

4-5

Page 292: 2130 Laser Alignment

Vertical Main Screen Function Keys

Enter Dimensions Use the Enter Dimensions key to advance to the Edit Dimensions screen where the dimensions for the machine being aligned can be entered. This is the first step of the three-key operation used in performing an alignment job. Refer to the Vertical Enter Dimensions section on page 4-17 for more information.

Sweep Laser Heads Use the Sweep Laser Heads key to advance to the data acquisition screen for the alignment method defined for the job. This is the second step of the three-key operation used in performing an alignment job. From this screen alignment data needed to determine the alignment condition of the machine is acquired. Refer to the Vertical Sweep Laser Heads section on page 4-29 for more information.

Move Machine Use the Move Machine key to advance to the Angular Move screen where the angular alignment condition can be reviewed. This is the third step of the three-key operation used in performing an alignment job. After the Angular Move screen, the program advances to the Offset Move screen where the machine moves can be reviewed. If an alignment correction is necessary that requires a live move, this can also be done from under this step. Refer to the Vertical Move Machine section on page 4-38 for more information.

NoteThe Enter key will perform the same function as the soft key for the highlighted program step. In addition, the Enter key can be used to advance you through an alignment job from beginning-to-end using the job parameters setup on the Alt Main screen.

4-6 Vertical Alignment

Page 293: 2130 Laser Alignment

Vertical Alt Main Screen

The vertical Alt Main screen (also known as the Main Menu Alt2 screen) allows you to setup alignment job parameters. The Alt Main screen is reached by pressing the Alt key on the Main screen.

Vertical Alt Main

4-7Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 294: 2130 Laser Alignment

Vertical Alt Main Screen Function Keys

NoteUse the Notes key to advance to the Notes screens where notes can be assigned to the current job. In addition to the predefined notes, user defined notes can also be created and assigned to the current job from under this option. Refer to the Notes section on page 3-7 for more information.

Machine Config Use the Machine Config key to advance to the Machine Configuration screen where the machine components for the job can be defined. Refer to the Vertical Machine Configuration section on page 4-11 for more information.

Laser Angle AdvanceUse the Laser Angle Advance key to define the fine and coarse incremental adjust-ments to be applied to the angular position of the laser heads during the data acqui-sition and live move operations. Refer to the Laser Angle Advance section on page 4-13 for more information.

Laser Mode Use the Laser Mode key to define the mode of operation for the alignment method defined. When selected, the mode is toggled between Standard (default) and Averaging.

The Standard mode of operation is the mode that is most often used during ver-tical alignments. In this mode of operation, the current laser reading is obtained from the laser heads.

The Averaging mode of operation is intended to allow multiple sampling of data in order to reduce the noise in the data by averaging all of the acquired values. In this mode of operation, the last 20 readings are averaged.

4-8 Vertical Alignment

Page 295: 2130 Laser Alignment

Laser Sample RateUse the Laser Sample Rate key to set the number of samples (in the range 1 to 25) to be averaged together to generate a single reading. Two samples (default) are typ-ically sufficient, but for example, if too much background vibration is present, you may want to increase the number of samples to 25. This option can also be changed after the job has been created from the Laser Head Status screen.

Estimate C Dim Use the Estimate C Dim key to define whether or not the C dimension is to be esti-mated. When selected, the selection is toggled between being enabled and dis-abled (default). When enabled, the program will estimate the C dimension to be one half of the B dimension.

Exit Laser Align Use the Exit Laser Align key to exit the Laser Alignment program and advance you to the 2130 Home screen.

Laser Config Use the Laser Config key to advance to the Laser Configuration screen where the laser head and analyzer addresses can be reviewed and set, and the Laser Head A and B locations can be set. Refer to the Vertical Laser Configuration section on page 4-15 for more information.

Job Manager Use the Job Manager key to advance to the Job Manager screens where a new job can be created from scratch using default job setups, a new job can be created using the job setup from an existing job, selected alignment jobs can be deleted from the analyzer, and jobs can be transferred to and from the PC. This option functions exactly as described for a horizontal alignment job. Refer to the Job Manager sec-tion on page 3-34 for more information.

Review Results Use the Review Results key to enable or disable (default) the Review Results option in the job flow. When enabled, you are able to review and average together the results from multiple acquisitions. Refer to the Vertical Review Results section on page 4-37 for more information.

4-9Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 296: 2130 Laser Alignment

Print JobThe Print Job key prints a summary report of the current job to the Virtual Printer, if the Virtual Printer is enabled under the General Setup screen of the System Firm-ware. A summary report includes job information, notes, soft foot data, and reading set data (machine feet moves and Angle/Offset data). The report includes only the first and last reading sets that were acquired. The summary report will be similar to the report displayed on page 3-10.

Job Reset

Clear Job Data Use the Clear Job Data function to clear all stored data and notes from the active job. Before any data is cleared, a warning message will be displayed asking the oper-ator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the data stored on the job will be cleared and the operator is taken back to the Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and you will return to the Alt Main screen.

Load Default ValuesUse the Load Default Values function to load job default parameters. Before any defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the operator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the job defaults are loaded and all job data is cleared and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

Load Default TolerancesUse the Load Default Tolerances function to load default alignment tolerances. Before any defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the operator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the default alignment tolerances are loaded and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

4-10 Vertical Alignment

Page 297: 2130 Laser Alignment

Vertical Machine Configuration

From the Machine Configuration screen you can select the machine components for the current vertical alignment job. The Machine Configuration screen is reached by pressing the Machine Config key on the Alt Main screen.

Vertical Machine Configuration Screen

When this option is first selected, the machine type defined for the upper machine will be highlighted by a red box around the machine type by default. The default machine types for the upper and lower machines are “Mach A” and “Mach B”.

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keysUse Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select between each of the machine types.

4-11Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 298: 2130 Laser Alignment

When “Other” is selected as the machine type you can enter a machine name (up to 7 characters in length). The following machine types can be defined for the job:

Vertical Machine Types

Vertical Machine Configuration Function Keys

Select Upper Machine Use the Select Upper Machine key to set the upper machine component to the machine type highlighted by the red box.

Select Lower MachineUse the Select Lower Machine key to set the lower machine component to the machine type highlighted by the red box.

4-12 Vertical Alignment

Page 299: 2130 Laser Alignment

Laser Angle Advance

From the Laser Angle Advance subwindow you can define the fine and coarse incremental adjustments to be applied to the angular position of the laser heads during the data acquisition and live move operations. The Laser Angle Advance subwindow is reached by pressing the Laser Angle Advance key on the Alt Main screen.

Laser Angle Advance Subwindow

4-13Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 300: 2130 Laser Alignment

Laser Angle Advance Function Keys

FineUse the Fine key to define the fine incremental adjustment (in degrees) to be applied to the angular position of the laser heads during the data acquisition and live move operations. The range of values that can be entered for the fine adjust-ment is 1 to 5 degrees. The default is 5.

CoarseUse the Coarse key to define the coarse incremental adjustment (in degrees) to be applied to the angular position of the laser heads during the data acquisition and live move operations. The range of values that can be entered for the fine adjust-ment is 5 to 90 degrees. The default is 45.

4-14 Vertical Alignment

Page 301: 2130 Laser Alignment

Vertical Laser Configuration

From the Laser Configuration screen you can configure the location for each of the laser heads during the alignment, check and set the heads and analyzer address, and check the operational status of the heads. The Laser Configuration screen is reached by pressing the Laser Config key on the Alt Main screen.

Vertical Laser Configuration Screen

The location of each head is based on how the machines are viewed. It does not matter which head is put on which machine; however, the analyzer must know each head’s location.

Caution!Selecting the proper configuration for the laser heads is extremely important! If the setting is wrong, all of the machine’s move calculations will be incorrect.

4-15Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 302: 2130 Laser Alignment

Although both Head A and Head B of the older version of Model 8215/8225 laser heads have gray front panels with black grid lines, A and B are marked on the front panel of the laser head. The newer version of Model 8215/8225 laser heads have A and B marked on the front panel, and additionally can be identified by their dif-ferent colored front panels. Head A has a gray front panel with white grid lines while Head B has a blue front panel with white grid lines.

NoteThe program automatically knows whether the Model 8215 or the Model 8225 laser heads are being used.

Vertical Laser Configuration Function Keys

Change Laser ConfigUse the Change Laser Config key to toggle configuration of the laser heads. The display must be set to match the actual location for each of the laser heads based on how the machines are to be viewed during the alignment.

Laser Address SelectionUse the Laser Address Selection key to check and set the head and analyzer addresses. This option functions exactly as described for a horizontal alignment job. Refer to the Laser Address Selection section on page 3-24 for more informa-tion.

Check LasersUse the Check Lasers key to check the operational status of the heads. Except for the following, this option functions similarly for a horizontal alignment job. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-24 for more information.

4-16 Vertical Alignment

Page 303: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

• Show Laser Angle

Use the Show Laser Angle key on the Alt screen to display the laser angle. This option is useful when performing alignments on horizontally mounted machinery where the movement is at the flange instead of at the feet. This option can also be changed from the Alt Manual Sweep screen and the Live Move option.

• Hide Laser Angle

Use the Hide Laser Angle key on the Alt screen similarly as you would the Show Laser Angle key except this key is used to hide the laser angle if it is dis-played. Since the angle sensors do not operate properly in the vertical orien-tation you must hide them and manually enter this information. This option can also be changed from the Alt Manual Sweep screen and the Live Move option.

Vertical Enter Dimensions

The Enter Dimensions screen allows you to enter the dimensions for the machine being aligned. The Enter Dimensions screen is reached by pressing the Enter Dimensions key on the Main screen.

4-17Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 304: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteThis section assumes that the fixtures are set up to the point that the laser heads are mounted.

Vertical Enter Dimensions Screen

NoteUnlike a horizontal job, when a machine has been configured as a “Fixed” machine for a vertical job the program will require all dimen-sions to be entered for that machine.

4-18 Vertical Alignment

Page 305: 2130 Laser Alignment

The machine RPM should be unique for each coupling that is defined for this job. If you have a variable speed machine, enter the highest RPM at which the coupling will be operated. Also, if a coupling design has shafts operating at different speeds enter the larger of the two. This parameter is used to establish alignment toler-ances. Although you are not required to enter the RPM before acquiring data, it is required before any results can be viewed. The range of values that can be entered for the RPM are 1 to 99999 RPM.

Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered for the B dimension is 0.01 to 3600 inches or 0.254 to 91440 mm. The range of values that can be entered for the A and C dimensions are -3600 to 3600 inches or -91440 to 91440 mm.

When entering any of the machine dimensions, the A dimension should be mea-sured and extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Dimensions B and C should be measured to the nearest 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section on page 3-45 for information about entering fractions.

Refer to the following table for a description of each dimension.

Dimension Measurement DescriptionMeasure

to the Nearest

A

Center of flange to be moved to the laser head face on the upper machine. To enter a measurement for a flange that falls inside the laser face, place a negative sign (–) in front of it.

1/8 inch(3 mm)

B Measure from the inside face of one laser head to the inside face of the other laser head.

1/16 inch(1.5 mm)

C

From upper laser head to center of coupling or, to the location where offset tolerances are measured. To enter a measurement where the center of the coupling falls outside or behind a laser face, place a negative sign (-) in front of the measurement.

1/16 inch(1.5 mm)

4-19Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 306: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteThe dimensions are the same for both the Model 8215 and the Model 8225 laser heads.

Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keysUse the Up, Down, Left, and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (highlighted with the red box around it).

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the Define Flange screen.

4-20 Vertical Alignment

Page 307: 2130 Laser Alignment

Define Flange

The Define Flange screen, allows you to enter the dimensions for the flange loca-tion where moves are to be made.

Define Flange Screen (circular flange)

4-21Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 308: 2130 Laser Alignment

Define Flange Screen (rectangular flange)

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to either the Sweep Laser Heads step or the Custom Pattern screen. If the custom pattern option is not enabled, once all required dimensions have been entered, the Enter Dimensions step back on the Main screen will be marked completed and you will advance to the Sweep Laser Heads step. If the custom pattern option is enabled, you will advance to the Custom Pat-tern screen.

4-22 Vertical Alignment

Page 309: 2130 Laser Alignment

Define Flange Function Keys

Change Flange Type Use the Change Flange Type key to toggle the displayed flange type between a circle (default) and a rectangle.

Custom Pattern Use the Custom Pattern key to enable or disable (default) the custom bolt pattern option for the flange. When enabled, the Enter key will advance you to the Custom Pattern screen where you can customize the flange. This is useful when the shaft center is not in the center of the flange or bolts have to be relocated or removed. Refer to the Custom Pattern section on page 4-25 for information.

Number of Bolts When a circular flange is defined, use the Number of Bolts key to define the total number of bolts on the flange. The range of values that can be entered for the fine adjustment is 3 to 64. The default is 4. This option is not available when a rectan-gular flange is defined.

Number of X Bolts When a rectangular flange is defined, use the Number of X Bolts key to define the total number of bolts on the flange in the X-direction. The range of values that can be entered for the number of X Bolts is 2 to 32. The default is 2. This option is not available when a circular flange is defined.

Number of Y Bolts When a rectangular flange is defined, use the Number of Y Bolts key to define the total number of bolts on the flange in the Y-direction. The range of values that can be entered for the number of Y Bolts is 2 to 32. The default is 2. This option is not available when a circular flange is defined.

4-23Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 310: 2130 Laser Alignment

Pattern X WidthWhen a circular or rectangular flange is defined, use the Pattern X Width key to define the X dimension width of the flange. Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered for the pattern X Width is 1 to 1000 inches or 25.4 to 25400 mm. The default is 1 inch (25.4 mm).

Pattern Y WidthWhen a rectangular flange is defined, use the Pattern Y -Width key to define the Y dimension width of the flange. Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered for the pattern Y Width is 1 to 1000 inches or 25.4 to 25400 mm. The default is 1 inch (25.4 mm). This option is not available when a circular flange is defined.

NoteWhen entering any of the flange width dimensions, the X and Y dimensions should be measured and extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section on page 3-45 for information about entering fractions.

4-24 Vertical Alignment

Page 311: 2130 Laser Alignment

Custom Pattern

The Custom Pattern screen, allows you to customize the flange (e.g. move the shaft center away from the flange center or move one or more bolts to a nonsymmetrical location). The Custom Pattern screen is reached by pressing the Enter key on the Define Flange screen, when the Custom Pattern option is enabled.

Custom Pattern Screen (Angle/Radius method)

4-25Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 312: 2130 Laser Alignment

Up and Down Arrow keysUse the Up and Down Arrow keys to select the item (e.g. the shaft center or bolt) you want to modify. When the shaft center is selected it will be highlighted in red while a selected bolt will be highlighted with the red circle around it. The Item to Edit key can be used to do the same.

Enter keyUse the Enter key, once all required machine dimensions have been entered, to mark the Enter Dimensions step back on the Main screen completed and advance to the Sweep Laser Heads step.

4-26 Vertical Alignment

Page 313: 2130 Laser Alignment

Custom Pattern Function Keys

Insert BoltUse the Insert Bolt key to insert an additional bolt at the selected bolt location. This in turn moves the bolt originally at that location to the flange center. This key is only active when the item selected for modification is a bolt.

Delete BoltUse the Delete Bolt key to delete the selected bolt. Before any bolt is deleted, a warning message will be displayed asking you if this is truly the operation to be per-formed. If you answer yes, then the selected bolt will be deleted. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted. This key is only active when the item selected for modification is a bolt and more than the minimum number of bolts for the flange type are present.

MethodUse the Method key to toggle the method between Angle/Radius and X/Y Offset. When the method is set to Angle/Radius, you can define the location of the selected item based on a polar coordinate system with the origin at the center of the flange. When the method is set to X/Y Offset, you can define the location of the selected item based on an X, Y coordinate system with the origin located in the bottom, left-hand corner of the figure.

Item to EditUse the Item to Edit key to select the item (e.g. the shaft center or bolt) you want to modify. When the shaft center is selected it will be highlighted in red while a selected bolt will be highlighted with the red circle around it. The Up and Down Arrow keys can be used to do the same.

4-27Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 314: 2130 Laser Alignment

Angle Use the Angle key to define the angle (in degrees) for the selected item. The range of values that can be entered is 0° to 360°. This option is not available when the method is set to X/Y Offset.

Radius Use the Radius key to define the radius for the selected item. Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered is 0 to one half the flange width defined back on the Define Flange screen. This option is not available when the method is set to X/Y Offset.

X OffsetUse the X Offset key to define the offset in the X-direction for the selected item. Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered is 0 to the flange X-width defined back on the Define Flange screen. This option is not available when the method is set to Angle/Radius.

Y OffsetUse the Y Offset key to define the offset in the Y-direction for the selected item. Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered is 0 to the flange Y-width defined back on the Define Flange screen. This option is not available when the method is set to Angle/Radius.

4-28 Vertical Alignment

Page 315: 2130 Laser Alignment

Vertical Sweep Laser Heads

Once all required machine dimensions have been entered, you are automatically advanced to the Sweep Laser Heads step. From the Main screen, the Sweep Laser Heads step is reached by pressing the Sweep Laser Heads key.

Main screen after entering vertical dimensions

The Manual Sweep method is used to acquire vertical alignment data. Data is mea-sured each time the laser heads are in alignment and the number keypad is pressed. Data from up to 180 positions may be recorded. This method is especially useful for performing uncoupled or non-rotational alignments or when too much background vibration is present.

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

4-29Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 316: 2130 Laser Alignment

Other than the angle sensors not being able to measure the rotational position when the laser heads are in the vertical orientation this method functions similarly for a horizontal alignment job. The Manual Sweep method requires the laser heads, or shafts, to be stopped at each position where data is to be taken and a key pressed to store a reading. Since the angle sensors do not operate properly in the vertical orientation the Laser Align program requires you to manually tell it the laser head position.

Before acquiring alignment data, develop an acquisition plan before taking shaft position data. One plan might be to measure the outside circumference and divide it into eight equal segments. Mark those locations on the flange and stop at each location to take data. Although a complete sweep is recommended, it is not needed. The arc of rotation can vary from as little as 45° to a full 360° (one revolu-tion); however, Emerson does recommend a minimum of 90°.

Starting Manual Sweep

4-30 Vertical Alignment

Page 317: 2130 Laser Alignment

The defined flange is displayed graphically in the bottom of the screen. The data acquisition angular location corresponding to the actual angular location of the laser heads is displayed just below the flange. A graphical representation of the data acquisition angular location is displayed in the center of the flange. The data acqui-sition line starts at the 0° position, which is usually the #1 Bolt position (as shown above). The current laser reading (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer units) for each laser head is displayed in reverse video just right of the flange.

Laser Angle AdvanceUse the Laser Angle Advance key on the Alt screen to define the fine and coarse incremental adjustments to be applied to the angular position of the laser heads during the data acquisition and live move operations. Refer to the Laser Angle Advance section on page 4-13 for more information.

Check Lasers keyUse the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

4-31Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 318: 2130 Laser Alignment

Review Results keyUse the Review Results key on the Alt screen to return to the Review Measurements screen where you can continue reviewing and averaging together the results from multiple acquisitions. This key is available only when the Review Results option is enabled on the Alt Main screen and the Review Measurements screen has been exited before the averaged reading set was saved. Refer to the Vertical Review Results section on page 4-37 for more information.

Acquiring data using Manual Sweep

Accept Readings keyUse the Accept Readings key to store the data when the laser head positions and data are as desired. The number of samples, displayed in the top of the screen just above the flange graphics, will increment by one (180 max). Each time a data point is stored and the laser heads are rotated to a new position, a thin black line is left behind to denote where data was acquired.

4-32 Vertical Alignment

Page 319: 2130 Laser Alignment

Caution!Before accepting any reading, ensure that the data acquisition location on the screen corresponds to the actual location of the laser heads.

NoteA minimum of 3 data points over a 45° sweep arc is required, but Emerson recommends a minimum of 8 data points (samples) acquired over a sweep arc of at least 90°.

NoteFor the greatest accuracy and repeatability, all readings should be acquired using the same direction of rotation. In addition, it is best to use the same direction of rotation as the machine rotates when run-ning normally.

Although the 8215/8225 laser fixtures are designed to be rotated a full revolution in two seconds - a smooth, uniform acceleration and deceleration during the rota-tion of the laser heads is necessary for accurate, reliable, and repeatable data.

Caution!To prevent damage to the laser heads, make sure the antennas do not come into contact with obstacles (e.g. the ground or base plate) as they are being rotated. Also, when performing an uncoupled alignment and the laser heads are mounted in close proximity to each other, make sure the antennas do not come into contact with each other as one laser head is rotated past the other.

Coarse and Fine Adjustment keysUse the Coarse and Fine Adjustment keys to move the data acquisition line clock-wise or counterclockwise around the flange by the number of degrees defined back on the Alt Main screen. Refer to the Laser Angle Advance section on page 4-13 for more information.

4-33Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 320: 2130 Laser Alignment

Clear keyUse the Clear key to clear the displayed data average, when the Laser Mode is set to Averaging. When the Laser Mode is set to Standard, this key is not available.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to accept the data, after you have acquired enough data (sam-ples). At this point the data is analyzed and a sine wave is curve fit to the data.

NoteA maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-played giving you the option of either discarding the last reading set taken or overwriting the 20th reading set with the last reading.

If the fit is satisfactory (85% and above), the program will mark the Sweep Laser Heads step back on the Main screen completed and advance you to the next step in the procedure. In addition to marking the Sweep Laser Heads step complete, the number of moves displayed in the upper section of the main screen is updated.

If the fit is unsatisfactory (less than 85%) a warning message displays to inform you that the data is “Unfit”. At this point either repeat the data acquisition or try to man-ually condition or edit the data using the edit data function. This built-in check helps alert you to the data losing reliability in the misalignment calculations. Refer to the Display Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more information.

NoteRemember, when shaft movement due to causes other than misalign-ment is present in the data this will appear as randomness (noise) in the data. This is not normally a problem when the misalignment is great, but will increasingly interfere as the misalignment decreases. Therefore, the better the alignment the more likely the chance will be of getting an unfit data warning.

4-34 Vertical Alignment

Page 321: 2130 Laser Alignment

Get Laser Angle keyUse the Get Laser Angle key on the Alt screen to automatically get the angle posi-tion of the laser heads. This option is useful when performing alignments on hori-zontally mounted machinery where the movement is at the flange instead of at the feet. This option can also be changed from the Alt Laser Head Status screen and the Live Move option.

Display during collection of angle data; note green background in 180° “window” - a graphic illustration that the two lasers are within 2° angular alignment of one another

The current laser head positions are displayed just to the left of the flange and graphically (represented by red lines) in the center of the flange. The background of the angle positions will be white if the laser heads are not within 2° of each other and green when the laser heads are within 2° of each other.

NoteIndependently of how the data acquisition angular location is obtained, other than the screen layout, the procedure for acquiring vertical data is the same.

4-35Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 322: 2130 Laser Alignment

Manually Locate Angle keyUse the Manually Locate Angle key on the Alt screen similarly as you would the Get Laser Angle key except this key is used to manually locate the data acquisition angular location corresponding to the actual angular location of the laser heads. Since the angle sensors do not operate properly in the vertical orientation you will have to hide them and manually enter this information. This option can also be changed from the Alt Laser Head Status screen and the Live Move option.

4-36 Vertical Alignment

Page 323: 2130 Laser Alignment

Vertical Review Results

From the Review Results (Measurements) screen, you are able to review and average together the results from multiple acquisitions. This option is useful when the repeatability of the data is a concern. Refer to the Sweep Mode Curve Data sec-tion on page 3-126 and Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information. Except for the following, this option functions similar to a horizontal alignment job. Refer to the Review Results section on page 3-121 for more information.

The Review Measurements screen is automatically displayed immediately after acquiring a set of alignment data when the Review Results option is enabled on the Alt Main screen.

NoteIf you exit the Review Measurements screen before saving the aver-aged reading set, you can return to it using the Review Results key on the Alt screen of the data acquisition screens.

Vertical Review Measurements Screen

4-37Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 324: 2130 Laser Alignment

The Review Measurements screen contains the alignment condition (angle and offset), the acquisition date and time, and a symbol representing the Manual Sweep acquisition method used for each of the readings acquired.

NoteA maximum of 20 reading sets (moves) can be stored on an align-ment job. If more than 20 reading sets are acquired a message is dis-played giving you the option of either discarding the last reading set taken or overwriting the 20th reading set with the last reading.

Vertical Move Machine

Once all required data has been acquired, you are automatically advanced to the machine moves screens. From the Main screen, the vertical moves screens are reached by pressing the Move Machine key.

Main screen after acquiring vertical alignment data

4-38 Vertical Alignment

Page 325: 2130 Laser Alignment

From the Move Machine step, you can review the angular and offset alignment conditions. Refer to the Angular Move section on page 4-39 and Offset Move sec-tion on page 4-41 for more information. If an alignment correction requires a live move, this can also be done from this step. Refer to the Vertical Live Move section on page 3-150 for more information.

Angular Move

From the Angular Move screen, you can review the angular alignment condition.

Angular Move Screen

The amount of movement at the machine flange (expressed in either mils or mil-limeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed in the table just to the right of the flange. Emerson recommends that the flange bolts be loosened and the shims be added (or removed) as suggested in the table. When correcting angular misalignment keep the flange offset movement to a minimum. After shim-ming is complete, re-tighten the flange bolts and take a new set of readings.

4-39Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 326: 2130 Laser Alignment

Enter keyUse the Enter key to advance to the next step in the Offset Move screen.

Angular Move Function Keys

Raise MachineUse the Raise Machine key to display the shim values equivalent to raising the machine. In this case, all shim values will be positive.

MedianUse the Median key to display the shim values equivalent to making the smallest moves. In this case, the shim values are centered about an average; therefore, they will be a mixture of positive and negative values.

Lower MachineUse the Lower Machine key to display the shim values equivalent to lowering the machine. In this case, all shim values will be negative.

Switch Move TypeUse the Switch Move Type key to toggle the displayed move type between Angular Move and Offset Move.

Data DetailUse the Data Detail key to advance to the tolerance plot screens where graphical representations of the alignment condition can be reviewed. Refer to the Vertical Data Detail (Tolerance Plots) section on page 4-45 for more information. In addi-tion, you can manually condition or edit the sine curve data using the edit data function.

4-40 Vertical Alignment

Page 327: 2130 Laser Alignment

Offset Move

From the Offset Move screen, you can review the offset alignment condition.

Offset Move Screen (dual move)

4-41Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 328: 2130 Laser Alignment

Offset Move Screen (single move)

The bull’s-eye target displayed just above the flange represents the alignment con-dition with respect to the tolerances defined for the job. If the tolerance condition is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer band will be red. If the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the middle band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the acceptable tolerance, but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center band (bull’s-eye) will be green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent tolerance, then the center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

The amount of movement required to align the machine (expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed just to the right of the flange. A graphical representation of the movement (represented by the single or dual arrows) is displayed in the center of the flange.

4-42 Vertical Alignment

Page 329: 2130 Laser Alignment

Enter keyUse the Enter key, once you have viewed the machine moves, to advance to the Main screen where the Move Machine step is marked completed and the Sweep Laser Heads step is highlighted.

Main screen after viewing machine moves

4-43Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 330: 2130 Laser Alignment

Offset Move Function Keys

Switch Move TypeUse the Switch Move Type key to toggle the displayed move type between Angular Move and Offset Move.

Data DetailUse the Data Detail key to advance to the tolerance plot screens where graphical representations of the alignment condition can be reviewed. Refer to the Vertical Data Detail (Tolerance Plots) section on page 4-45 for more information. In addi-tion, you can manually condition or edit the sine curve data using the edit data function.

Show Single MoveUse the Show Single Move key to display the single move solution.

Show Dual MoveUse the Show Dual Move key to display the dual move solution.

Live MoveUse the Live Move key to observe machine movement while making machine moves. Refer to the Vertical Live Move section on page 3-150 for more information.

4-44 Vertical Alignment

Page 331: 2130 Laser Alignment

Vertical Data Detail (Tolerance Plots)

From the Data Detail (Tolerance Plot) screens you can review the graphical repre-sentation of the alignment condition. In addition, you can manually condition or edit the sine curve data using the edit data function. Refer to the Display Sine Fit section on page 3-168 for more information. The tolerance plot screens are reached by pressing the Data Detail key on the machine move screens. This option is available only when alignment data is stored on the job.

Except for the following, this option functions similarly for a horizontal alignment job. Refer to the Data Detail (Tolerance Plot) section on page 3-162 for more infor-mation.

Vertical Quad Tolerance Plot

4-45Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 332: 2130 Laser Alignment

On the four quadrant tolerance plot screen, if the Tolerance Type is Standard, alignment angle versus offset data is plotted. In this plot, both the positive and neg-ative values for the reading sets are plotted.

Vertical Single Tolerance Plot

On the single tolerance plot screen, alignment data is plotted similarly to the four quadrant tolerance plot, except in this case only the absolute values for the reading sets are plotted.

4-46 Vertical Alignment

Page 333: 2130 Laser Alignment

Vertical Alignment Live Move

The Live Move option allows you to observe machine movement while making machine moves. The Live Move option is initiated by pressing the Live Move key on the Offset Move screen.

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

4-47Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 334: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteIf you try to start another live move after stopping a live move opera-tion and before a new set of data has been acquired, a warning mes-sage will be displayed to inform you that a live move may have been done since alignment data was last acquired. Once a live move has been done a second live move should not be done without first acquiring a new set of laser readings. If you answer yes, then you will continue with the live move. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted. This same message is also displayed on an activated align-ment job if a new set of data has not been acquired since the job was activated.

Vertical Alignment Live Move Screen

4-48 Vertical Alignment

Page 335: 2130 Laser Alignment

The Live Move screen prompts you to position the laser heads before starting the live move. The defined flange is displayed graphically at the bottom of the screen. The data acquisition angular location corresponding to the actual angular location of the laser heads is displayed just below the flange. A graphical representation of the data acquisition angular location is displayed in the center of the flange. The data acquisition line starts at the 0° position, which is usually the #1 Bolt position (as illustrated above).

Start keyUse the Start key to start the live move after the laser heads are in the chosen rota-tional position. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Coarse and Fine Adjustment keysUse the Coarse or Fine Adjustment keys to move the data acquisition line clockwise or counterclockwise around the flange by the number of degrees defined back on the Alt Main screen. Refer to the Laser Angle Advance section on page 4-13 for more information.

Laser Angle AdvanceUse the Laser Angle Advance key on the Alt screen to define the fine and coarse incremental adjustments to be applied to the angular position of the laser heads during the data acquisition and live move operations. Refer to the Laser Angle Advance section on page 4-13 for more information.

Check Lasers keyUse the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-24 for more information.

Caution!Do not reposition the laser heads after the live move has been started. Changing the positions of the laser heads after starting the live move will cause the move to be incorrect.

4-49Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 336: 2130 Laser Alignment

Caution!Do not loosen the flange hold down bolts until after the live move has been started. Loosening the flange hold down bolts prior to starting the live move can cause the move to be incorrect.

Alignment condition is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance

Once the live move operation is started, the offset movement required to align the machine is displayed just to the right of the flange. The angle position (represented by a red hash mark) is displayed on the outer most part of the flange.

4-50 Vertical Alignment

Page 337: 2130 Laser Alignment

The bull’s-eye target displayed just above the flange represents a continuous update of the alignment condition with respect to the tolerances defined for the job. If the tolerance condition is greater than 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the outer band will be red. If the tolerance condition is 1 to 2 times the acceptable tolerance, then the middle band will be yellow. If the tolerance condition is less than the acceptable tolerance, but greater than the excellent tolerance, then the center band (bull’s-eye) will be green. If the tolerance condition is less than the excellent tolerance, then the center band will have a black star displayed in it. Refer to the Tolerances section on page 3-193 for more information.

The amount of movement required to align the machine (expressed in either mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units) is displayed just to the right of the flange. A graphical representation of the movement (represented by single or dual arrows) is displayed in the center of the flange.

Once the live move has been started loosen the flange hold down bolts and move the machine(s) until they are within tolerance, and then retighten the flange hold down bolts before exiting the live mode.

Stop keyUse the Stop key to stop the live move once the machine(s) are within tolerance and advance back to the move screen this option was accessed from. The Enter key can be used to do the same.

Caution!When the machine(s) are within tolerance, before exiting the live move, tighten the flange hold down bolts. If the machine(s) remain within tolerance when the flange hold down bolts are tightened, then you can exit the Live Move option.

Caution!Do not use a hammer to move machines. These impacts may move either sensor head, causing improper machine positioning. Emerson recommends that you use jack bolts (permanent or portable).

4-51Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 338: 2130 Laser Alignment

Caution!On completion of a live move, always acquire a new set of alignment data to verify and finalize the machine’s alignment condition.

Caution!Never rely on a live machine move for the final alignment condition of the machine. Since there is always some variability introduced into the alignment data due to shaft clearances, bearing faults, base deterioration, etc. Refer to the Data Quality section on page 3-127 for more information.

4-52 Vertical Alignment

Page 339: 2130 Laser Alignment

Show Shim TableUse the Show Shim Table key to display the last shim table and values selected back on the Angular Move screen. If Raise Machine was last selected, then the shim values are equivalent to raising the machine. In this case, all shim values will be pos-itive. If Median was last selected, then the shim values are equivalent to making the smallest moves. In this case, the shim values are centered about an average; there-fore, they will be a mixture of positive and negative values. If Lower Machine was last selected, then the shim values are equivalent to lowering the machine. In this case, all shim values will be negative.

Live Move Screen with Angular Move shim table displayed

Show Single MoveUse the Show Single Move key to display the single move solution.

Show Dual MoveUse the Show Dual Move key to display the dual move solution.

4-53Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 340: 2130 Laser Alignment

Get Laser Angle keyUse the Get Laser Angle key on the Alt screen to automatically get the angle posi-tion of the laser heads. This option is useful when performing alignments on hori-zontally mounted machinery where the movement is at the flange instead of at the feet. This option can also be changed from the Alt Laser Head Status screen and the Live Move option.

Angles automatically collected (prior to Start)

4-54 Vertical Alignment

Page 341: 2130 Laser Alignment

Angles automatically collected (After Start)

The current laser head positions are displayed just below the flange. The back-ground of the angle positions will be white if the laser heads are not within 2° of each other and green when the laser heads are within 2° of each other. The average angle position (represented by a red line or red hash mark) is displayed on the inside or outer most part of the flange, depending on the screen.

NoteIndependently of how the data acquisition angular location is obtained, other than the screen layout, the procedure for acquiring vertical data is the same.

4-55Vertical Alt Main Screen

Page 342: 2130 Laser Alignment

Manually Locate Angle keyUse the Manually Locate Angle key on the Alt screen similarly as you would the Get Laser Angle key except this key is used to manually locate the data acquisition angular location corresponding to the actual angular location of the laser heads. Since the angle sensors do not operate properly in the vertical orientation you must hide them and manually enter this information. This option can also be changed from the Alt Laser Head Status screen and the Live Move option.

4-56 Vertical Alignment

Page 343: 2130 Laser Alignment

Chapter 5

Straightness Measurements1

The straightness feature found in the Advanced 2130 Laser Align application is used to determine surface profiles. This profile can be of a motor baseplate or checking the crown on a rolling application. You must use a set of laser sensor heads and mounting fixtures (CSI model 8AA50) to acquire surface profile read-ings.

5-1

Page 344: 2130 Laser Alignment

HelpDepending on where you are within the program, an alignment helper may be available at the bottom of the screen to provide you with a brief explanation of the highlighted step or screen. In addition to the alignment helper, the functionality of any soft key is available. This is accessed by pressing the 2130 Help key once, and then pressing the soft key for which help is desired. Pressing the Help key twice returns a help message for the active program screen. If further help is required, refer to the appropriate section(s) in this manual.

Basic Straightness Measurement StepsThree basic steps are required to acquire straightness measurements.

1 Define the straightness job• Setup the job parameters.

• Enter profile dimensions.

2 Acquire straightness data• Acquire straightness data to determine the surface profile of the compo-

nent.

Note

3 Review straightness profile results• Review surface profile.

5-2 Straightness Measurements

Page 345: 2130 Laser Alignment

Straightness Main Screen

The straightness main Laser Align Application screen (sometimes referred to as the Main Menu) lets you monitor your progress throughout the straightness job. When a straightness job is active, the Main screen will look as shown below.

Straightness Main screen at job start

The application defaults to a predefined setup when a new job is created. The type of job, Job ID, Equipment ID, number of machine moves, and number of notes attached to the job are displayed in the upper portion of the main screen.

NoteUnless otherwise noted, any defaults listed are displayed only at first. Once a field is modified from the default, the program uses the latest entry for that field.

5-3

Page 346: 2130 Laser Alignment

The steps required to acquire straightness measurements are displayed in the center portion of the main screen. The 2130 Laser Align program leads you through each step of a routine straightness procedure starting with the Enter Dimensions selection at the Main screen. Once a straightness job has started the next uncompleted step in the recommended procedure is highlighted.

An [X] signifies a completed step. As you complete steps, the next recommended step is highlighted. Initially, the Surface Profile step is displayed, but grayed out until you’ve completed first two required steps which are critical to the straightness jobs.

Up and Down Arrow keysUse the Up and Down Arrow keys to highlight each feature. If you select an inactive step, a popup message reminds you that the selected step is inactive due to missing information.

Three Step Straightness Measurements

To simulate the basic steps required to complete a straightness job, the 2130 Laser Align main screen is set up to allow a straightness job to be performed using the fol-lowing three steps:

1 Enter Dimensions• Enter profile dimensions.

2 Move Laser Heads• Acquire straightness data to determine the surface profile of the compo-

nent.

3 Surface Profile• Review surface profile.

5-4 Straightness Measurements

Page 347: 2130 Laser Alignment

Straightness Main Screen Function Keys

Enter Dimensions Use the Enter Dimensions key to advance to the Edit Dimensions screen where the dimensions for the profile being measured can be entered. This is the first step of the three-key operation used in performing a straightness job. Refer to the Straight-ness Enter Dimensions section on page 5-11 for more information.

Move Laser Heads Use the Move Laser Heads key to advance to the data acquisition screen. This is the second step of the three-key operation used in performing a straightness job. From this screen straightness data needed to determine the surface profile is acquired. Refer to the Straightness Move Laser Heads section on page 5-15 for more informa-tion.

Surface Profile Use the Surface Profile key to advance to the plot screen where the surface profile can be reviewed. This is the third step of the three-key operation used in per-forming a straightness job. Refer to the Straightness Surface Profile section on page 5-18 for more information.

NoteThe Enter key will perform the same function as the soft key for the highlighted program step. In addition, the Enter key can be used to advance you through a straightness job from beginning-to-end using the job parameters setup on the Alt Main screen.

5-5

Page 348: 2130 Laser Alignment

Straightness Alt Main Screen

The straightness Alt Main screen (also known as the Main Menu Alt2 screen) allows you to setup straightness job parameters. The Alt Main screen is reached by pressing the Alt key on the Main screen.

Straightness Alt Main

Straightness Alt Main Screen Function Keys

NoteUse the Notes key to advance to the Notes screens where notes can be assigned to the current job. In addition to the predefined notes, user defined notes can also be created and assigned to the current job from under this option. Refer to the Notes section on page 3-8 for more information.

5-6 Straightness Measurements

Page 349: 2130 Laser Alignment

Laser Mode Use the Laser Mode key to define the mode of operation for the alignment method defined. When selected, the mode is toggled between Standard (default) and Averaging.

The Standard mode of operation is the mode that is most often used when acquiring straightness data. In this mode of operation, the current laser reading is obtained from the laser heads.

The Averaging mode of operation is intended to allow multiple sampling of data in order to reduce the noise in the data by averaging all of the acquired values. In this mode of operation, readings are continuously averaged.

Laser Sample RateUse the Laser Sample Rate key to set the number of samples (in the range 1 to 25) to be averaged together to generate a single reading. Two samples (default) are typ-ically sufficient, but for example, if too much background vibration is present, you may want to increase the number of samples to 25. This option can also be changed after the job has been created from the Laser Head Status screen.

Exit Laser Align Use the Exit Laser Align key to exit the Laser Alignment program and advance to the 2130 Home screen.

Laser Config Use the Laser Config key to advance to the Laser Configuration screen where the laser head and analyzer addresses can be reviewed and set, and the Laser Head A and B locations can be set. Refer to the Straightness Laser Configuration section on page 5-9 for more information.

Job Manager Use the Job Manager key to advance to the Job Manager screens where a new job can be created from scratch using default job setups, a new job can be created using the job setup from an existing job, selected alignment jobs can be deleted from the analyzer, and jobs can be transferred to and from the PC. This option functions exactly as described for a horizontal alignment job. Refer to the Job Manager sec-tion on page 3-34 for more information.

5-7

Page 350: 2130 Laser Alignment

Job ResetThe Job Reset key allows the operator to "Clear Job Data" or "Load Default Values".

Clear Job DataUse the Clear Job Data function to clear all stored data and notes from the active job. Before any data is cleared, a warning message will be displayed asking the oper-ator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the data stored on the job will be cleared and the operator is taken back to the Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and you will return to the Alt Main screen.

Load Default ValuesUse the Load Default Values function to load job default parameters. Before any defaults are loaded, a warning message will be displayed asking the operator if this is truly the operation to be performed. If the operator answers yes, then the job defaults are loaded and all job data is cleared and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen. If the operator answers no, then the operation is aborted and the operator remains at the Alt Main screen.

5-8 Straightness Measurements

Page 351: 2130 Laser Alignment

Straightness Laser Configuration

From the Laser Configuration screen you can configure the location for each of the laser heads during the profile measurements, check and set the heads and ana-lyzer address, and check the operational status of the heads. The Laser Configura-tion screen is reached by pressing the Laser Config key on the Alt Main screen.

Straightness Laser Configuration Screen

The location of each head is based on how the profile is viewed. It does not matter which head is on one side or another; however, the analyzer must know each head’s location.

Although both Head A and Head B of the older version of Model 8215/8225 laser heads have gray front panels with black grid lines, A and B are marked on the front panel of the laser head. The newer version of Model 8215/8225 laser heads have A and B marked on the front panel, and in addition can be identified by their dif-ferent colored front panels. Head A has a gray front panel with white grid lines while Head B has a blue front panel with white grid lines.

5-9

Page 352: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteThe program automatically knows whether the Model 8215 or the Model 8225 laser heads are being used.

Straightness Laser Configuration Function Keys

Change Laser ConfigUse the Change Laser Config key to togglethe configuration of the laser heads. The display must be set to match the actual location for each of the laser heads based on how the machines are to be viewed during the alignment.

There are four ways to configure the laser fixtures. The first consideration is which fixture is to be fixed and which one will be moved. The configuration shown above is for the left fixture (Head A in this case) to be fixed (represented by a dashed line/arrow pointing in the direction of the moved fixture) while the right fixture (Head B in this case) is to be moved (represented by position numbers followed by an ellipsis).

Laser Address SelectionUse the Laser Address Selection key to check and set the head and analyzer addresses. This option functions exactly as described for a horizontal alignment job. Refer to the Laser Address Selection section on page 3-26 for more informa-tion.

Check LasersUse the Check Lasers key to check the operational status of the heads. This option functions exactly as described for a horizontal alignment job. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information.

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

5-10 Straightness Measurements

Page 353: 2130 Laser Alignment

Straightness Enter Dimensions

The Enter Dimensions screen allows you to enter the dimensions for the profile being measured. The Enter Dimensions screen is reached by pressing the Enter Dimensions key on the Main screen.

NoteThis section assumes that the fixtures are set up to the point that the laser heads are mounted.

Straightness Enter Dimensions Screen

5-11

Page 354: 2130 Laser Alignment

The configuration shown above is for the left fixture (Head A in this case) to be fixed (represented by a dashed line/arrow pointing in the direction of the moved fixture) while the right fixture (Head B in this case) is to be moved (identified with position numbers). The Enter Dimensions screen will display up to three measure-ment locations at one time. If the last segment defined (furthest from the fixed laser head) is displayed, the reference line will extend no further than the last laser to indicate that this is the last measurement location for the moveable laser head defined (as illustrated above).

Measurement locations defined beyond what is displayed

5-12 Straightness Measurements

Page 355: 2130 Laser Alignment

If the last segment displayed is not the last measurement location for the moveable laser head defined, the reference line will extend beyond the last laser head dis-played to indicate that more measurement locations are defined (as illustrated above).

Six Measurement locations defined

A graph representing the overall setup is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The laser heads for the each of the segments defined, including the fixed laser head are represented on the graph by miniaturized laser fixtures. The positions (segment lengths) for each of the laser heads will be to scale. The highlighted segment is rep-resented on the graph by a small arrow centered between the segment’s two laser heads. The reference line from the location of the fixed laser head is represented on the graph by a dashed line protruding from the fixed laser head in the direction (indicated by an arrowhead) of the measurement locations for the moveable laser head. In the example screen above, a total of six measurement segments have been defined (represented by miniaturized laser fixtures) and the last (or fifth) segment field is active (represented by a small arrow).

5-13

Page 356: 2130 Laser Alignment

Dimensions can be expressed in either inches or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. The range of values that can be entered is 0.01 to 3600 inches or 0.254 to 91440 mm. Each dimension should be measured and extended to the nearest 1/8 inch (3 mm). Refer to the Entering Fractions section on page 3-51 for information about entering fractions.

Up Arrow keyUse the Up Arrow key to insert a measurement segment just ahead of the high-lighted segment. An inserted segment will have the same length as the highlighted segment. Up to 50 segments can be defined. Therefore, this key is only active when less than 50 segments have been defined.

Down Arrow keyUse the Down Arrow key to delete the highlighted segment. Before any segment is deleted, a warning message will be displayed asking you if this is truly the operation to be performed. If you answer yes, then the highlighted segment will be deleted. If you answer no, then the operation is aborted. No less than 2 segments can be defined. Therefore, this key is only active when more than 2 segments have been defined.

Caution!Use extreme caution with the delete segment option when the segment has impor-tant profile data stored on it. Once you answer yes to the warning message all data will be lost.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to select the field you want to modify (high-lighted with the red box around it).

Enter keyUse the Enter key, once all required machine dimensions have been entered, to mark the Enter Dimensions step back on the Main screen completed and advance to the Move Laser Heads step.

5-14 Straightness Measurements

Page 357: 2130 Laser Alignment

Straightness Move Laser Heads

Once all required machine dimensions have been entered, you are automatically advanced to the data acquisition screen. From the Main screen, the data acquisition screen is reached by pressing the Move Laser Heads key.

Main screen after entering profile dimensions

Laser communications with the moveable head must be established to collect data at the defined segments.

NoteBoth laser heads need to be turned on for this option to function properly.

5-15

Page 358: 2130 Laser Alignment

In general this alignment method is most easily accomplished by having the sleep-mode of the laser heads disabled.

NoteTo disable the sleep mode on each laser head, with the laser heads powered off, press and hold down the Power Buttons. This will cause the laser heads and their corresponding LED’s to power on for approximately 2 seconds. Then laser heads and their corresponding LED’s will power off for approximately 3 seconds. After the laser heads and their corresponding LED’s power back on again the shut-down mode will be disabled. To re-enable the sleep mode, just power the heads off.

Acquiring Straightness Data

5-16 Straightness Measurements

Page 359: 2130 Laser Alignment

The current laser reading (in mils or mm, depending on the analyzer units) is dis-played for the selected segment (highlighted with the red box around it). Dashed lines displayed just under a segment indicate that no data has been accepted for that segment. Start at the farthest point and center both lasers. The moveable sensor head should be positioned so that the beam from the stationary head is hor-izontally centered in the moveable heads target. If it is not within a band ± 40 mils of the center vertical axis, the error message “Beam horizontally off center” will be displayed. To remove the message, readjust the moveable sensor head.

Just like the Enter Dimensions screen, the Straightness Data screen will display up to three measurement locations at one time. If the last segment defined (furthest from the fixed laser head) is displayed, the reference line will extend no further than the last laser to indicate that this is the last measurement location for the move-able laser head defined (as shown above). If the last segment displayed is not the last measurement location for the moveable laser head defined, the reference line will extend beyond the last laser head displayed to indicate that more measurement locations are defined.

A graph representing the overall setup is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The laser heads for the each of the segments defined, including the fixed laser head are represented on the graph by miniaturized laser fixtures. The positions (segment lengths) for each of the laser heads will be to scale. The selected segment is repre-sented on the graph by a small arrow just below that segment laser head. The refer-ence line from the location of the fixed laser head is represented on the graph by a dashed line protruding from the fixed laser head in the direction (indicated by an arrowhead) of the measurement locations for the moveable laser head. In the example screen above, a total of six measurement segments have been defined (represented by miniaturized laser fixtures) and the last segment is selected (repre-sented by a small arrow just below it).

Check Lasers keyUse the Check Lasers key on the Alt screen to check the operational status of the heads. Refer to the Check Lasers section on page 3-30 for more information

Accept Reading keyUse the Accept Reading key to accept and store the value displayed.

First keyUse the First key to move to the first segment (closest to the fixed head).

5-17

Page 360: 2130 Laser Alignment

Last keyUse the Last key to move to the last segment (furthest from the fixed head).

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to move to the next segment to the left and right.

Clear keyUse the Clear key to delete a reading stored on the selected segment.

Enter keyUse the Enter key to accept all the readings stored on each segment and advance to the Surface Profile plot.

Straightness Surface Profile

Once all data has been acquired, you are automatically advanced to the surface pro-file plot screen. From the Main screen, the surface profile plot screen is reached by pressing the Surface Profile key.

Main screen after acquiring straightness data

5-18 Straightness Measurements

Page 361: 2130 Laser Alignment

From the surface profile plot screen, you can review the results of the profile mea-surements.

Surface Profile Plot

Segment readings will be plotted on the x-y graph with lines connecting each of the readings. Readings will be either in mils or millimeters (mm), depending on the analyzer units. A reference line represented by a dashed line will be displayed hor-izontally along the origin of the Y-Axis.

When plotting straightness profile readings, it is the relationship of the measured readings to the reference line that is plotted and not the actual measured readings themselves. The height of the first and last segment for which readings were acquired will be set to zero; therefore, they will be located on the reference line. The height for all other segments for which readings were measured will be their calculated height from the reference line.

Any segments for which readings have not been measured will be displayed at the appropriate segment distance along the X-axis. When the cursor is active on one of these segments it will be indicated as not being measured. When a cursor is active, the following values for the selected reading are displayed just below the plot:

5-19

Page 362: 2130 Laser Alignment

• Segment number

This variable indicates the segment number of the selected reading.

• Distance

This variable indicates the segment distance from the fixed laser head.

• Measured value

This variable indicates the measured reading value for the segment.

• Height

This variable indicates the height of the segment reading from the laser reference line (dotted line).

The available soft keys function similarly for most horizontal alignment job plots. Refer to the Data Detail (Tolerance Plot) section on page 3-162 for more informa-tion about these keys.

Up and Down Arrow keysUse the Up and Down Arrow keys to expand and compress (contract) the Y Axis by a factor of two.

Left and Right Arrow keysUse the Left and Right Arrow keys to move the cursor between the readings.

5-20 Straightness Measurements

Page 363: 2130 Laser Alignment

Enter keyUse the Enter key, once you have reviewed the surface profile, to advance to the Main screen where the Surface Profile step is marked completed and the Move Laser Heads step is highlighted.

Main screen after viewing surface profile

5-21

Page 364: 2130 Laser Alignment

5-22 Straightness Measurements

Page 365: 2130 Laser Alignment

Appendix A

Application Information

Machinery Shaft Alignment – General Overview

Poor shaft alignment can cause the following problems:

• Bearing failure

• Shaft deflection fatigue

• Seal leakage and failure

• Coupling failure

• Internal heating

• High energy consumption

• Excessive vibrations (studies have shown that almost 50% of excessive vibra-tion in direct-coupled rotating equipment is due to misalignment)

Proper machine alignment will result in:

• Less downtime (increased production)

• Increased bearing life

• Lower energy costs

• Increased coupling life

• Lower vibration (lower maintenance costs, even on surrounding machinery)

A successful alignment job involves completing at least five major steps:

• Pre-job preparation and setup (considering items such as soft foot, base integrity, pipe strain, documentation, and tolerances)

• Measurement of the amount and direction of misalignment

• Calculating corrective moves

• Actually moving the equipment within preset tolerances

• Documentation of work done for use in future alignment jobs

A-1

Page 366: 2130 Laser Alignment

Early alignment methods involved using a straightedge along the coupling rims. This is still a good procedure to use as a preliminary step. In fact, for low speed machines, operated infrequently for short periods of time, it may be all that is needed.

However, more complex machines require more than this. Feeler gages, inside micrometers, and dial indicators are now used extensively for taking precise align-ment measurements and monitoring corrective moves. These tools can give good results when used properly.

Mistakes, however, can cause errors in the alignment procedure. Errors that com-monly occur are:

• Failing to document the job setup, problems, findings, and data

• Failing to use good indicator brackets

• Failing to determine the correct amount of bracket sag

• Misreading the indicators

• Failing to detect sticking indicators

• Mistakes in recording and interpreting the data

• Errors in calculating the moves

• Errors in making moves

These types of errors are even more likely to occur when you have pressure to com-plete the job quickly.

The Emerson CSI alignment equipment can help you avoid these kinds of mis-takes. Our adjustable brackets are designed to fit most machines. Since there are no axial projecting arms, bracket sag is zero. Misalignment readings are calculated automatically and required moves are then displayed. If a serious mistake is made, the system will prompt you for corrected entries before moving on to the next step.

Completed jobs are easily documented. Documented jobs can then be stored in UltraMgr, a PC-based, corrective technologies information management system. This documented history can be used to enhance troubleshooting, identify per-sonnel candidates for additional training, reduce alignment time, etc. See “UltraMgr” on page 3-199 for more information.

A-2 -

Page 367: 2130 Laser Alignment

Alignment Application Notes

To achieve ideal machine alignment, the shaft centerline of one machine element (such as a motor) must coincide with the centerline extension of another machine shaft (such as a pump) during operation. In more complex applications, three or more elements may be aligned in a train.

A-3Alignment Application Notes

Page 368: 2130 Laser Alignment

Misalignment can occur both horizontally and vertically. Most misaligned machines have a combination of offset and angular misalignment (see following figure).

Alignment Examples

A-4 -

Page 369: 2130 Laser Alignment

Pre-job Preparation and Setup

Before starting any alignment job, the history of alignments performed on this machine(s) should be reviewed. Were any special problems found during the pre-vious alignment; if so, what were they (soft foot, piping strain, coupling problems, etc.)? How well was the machine aligned and who performed the alignment? Answering these questions along with having a predefined job setup reduces the pre-job preparation time and decreases the total time to do the job.

Now that the past is known, before proceeding with alignment measurements, ensure that your machine(s) are mounted on the base, or foundation, with no soft foot condition present. If one of your machines is defined to be fixed, soft foot should be checked for that machine also. Soft foot problems can place stress on the machine when the anchor bolts are tightened. Uneven height of the base surface, dirt or corrosion under the feet, or other irregularities can all cause the machine to be supported unevenly — a condition known as “soft foot”. In addition to preventing proper machine alignment, extreme soft foot conditions can actually cause damage to the machine (warped or cracked feet, etc.).

Two major reasons for correcting soft foot are (1) to avoid “chasing your tail” during the alignment and (2) to remove the stress and enable the machine(s) to operate at their best. Therefore, all machines should be checked for soft foot, not just the machine being moved.

Additional pre-alignment considerations include:

• Proper foundation

• Grouting (suitable material with no voids or cracks)

• Baseplate (must be clean, rigid, and properly designed)

• Coupling (properly selected and installed)

• Machinery element supports (no cracks and tight)

• Minimize pipe strain

Proper FoundationOn new installations, allow foundation concrete to cure sufficiently before installing your machines. Normally, you should not mount machines directly on the foundation. Base plates usually provide more stability. Also, to make future alignments easier, a set of high quality (stainless steel, etc.) pre-cut shims should be placed beneath each foot. These should be at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

A-5Alignment Application Notes

Page 370: 2130 Laser Alignment

Coupling ConsiderationsEmerson’s alignment system is not affected by axial float and the effects from tor-sional play (backlash) in the coupling are minimal. However, you should ensure that the coupling is properly installed and not in such poor condition that it adversely affects the alignment process. Also, Emerson recommends (while align-ment is being performed) that you eliminate torsional play by rotating the driving machine in the same direction that it normally operates. If necessary, put a drag on the driven end to prevent gravity overswing.

Minimize Pipe StrainExcessive pipe strain can create serious problems and should be corrected before attempting machine alignment. Ensure that pipes are fitted correctly and, if neces-sary, have some flexibility. In some cases, stationary pipes fitted directly to the machine can cause machine movement as they heat up (thermal growth).

Changes That Occur During Operation

Machine alignment can change significantly as machines are started from a “cold” position and run up to operating speed (“hot” position). Some factors that can influence alignment include:

• Thermal growth

• Torque transmission forces

• Aerodynamic forces

• Hydraulic forces

Thermal GrowthUnfortunately, machines that must be aligned may not expand thermally at the same rate. Because of this, you may have to intentionally misalign them in their “cold” positions in order to achieve alignment when they are “hot”. The following drawing shows an example of this.

A-6 -

Page 371: 2130 Laser Alignment

Different Thermal Expansion Rate Examples

The Model 2130 Laser Align program allows you to input the amount of vertical and horizontal thermal growth at each machine foot. There are several methods that can be used to calculate this growth.

A-7Alignment Application Notes

Page 372: 2130 Laser Alignment

Alignment Pitfalls

Some pitfalls to good alignment are:

• Improperly or not correcting for soft foot

• Thermal growth

• Excessive shaft play or radial clearances

• Bent shafts

• Damaged bearings

• Torsional play

A-8 -

Page 373: 2130 Laser Alignment

Appendix B

Foot Pre-Check Types

Foot Pre-Check Measurement Methods – Soft Foot and Frame Distortion Index (FDI)

Soft foot is a condition where all feet (typically four) of a machine component (such as a motor or gearbox) will not rest on the same plane. This condition also exists if the machine baseplate pads (where the machine foot rests) are not on that same plane. If this condition continues to exist and is not corrected, two problems will occur.

First, it will be very difficult to align the machine. You will appear to be “going in cir-cles” trying to move the machine into alignment. Second, but most important, the machine will not operate properly. The component was not designed to operate in a bound condition. When this happens, binding will occur causing stress at the bearings and changing the operating clearances (inside the component). To pre-vent binding, you must check all the feet, even those on the machine not being moved.

Traditional methods of measuring soft foot conditions included mounting a dial indicator at the machine foot (similar to Fig 1). The hold-down bolt was then loos-ened while the indicator was watched for movement. If the indicator moved more than a predetermined amount (usually 0.003 inch), the foot required correction. A shim equal to the amount of the indicator movement was then shoved under the foot.

Fig 1 Fig 2

B-1

Page 374: 2130 Laser Alignment

This method assumed that a parallel soft foot existed. However, a large percentage of problem feet are angular soft feet (similar to Fig 2). Correcting this type of problem with a full shim can make the condition worse (see Fig 3). Correction should be determined with a set of thickness gauges (feeler gauges). The result is usually a wedge shim similar to Fig 4.

The laser alignment system allows you to locate the problem feet and bypass those feet that are OK. While the hold-down bolts are individually loosened and retight-ened, the laser system will measure the shaft to shaft position. This actually mea-sures how much each connection affects shaft alignment. In a perfect condition, loosening bolts should not move the shafts at all.

Two different laser methods are available to evaluate the measured movement at the shafts. They are:

• Soft Foot

• Frame Distortion Index (FDI)

Although they evaluate the data differently, both methods give you a sense of soft foot severity at each location. Soft Foot results are shown by the number of X’s dis-played and FDI results are shown as a numerical value.

Fig 3 Fig 4

B-2 -

Page 375: 2130 Laser Alignment

Soft Foot EvaluationThe Soft Foot evaluation provides you with a sense of severity without showing numbers. Numbers are not used because, most of the time, they are mistaken for the value of the shims (totally wrong). When the numbers are calculated, they are compared against the tolerance (usually 0.5 mils/inch). If a particular foot is below the toler-ance, it is labeled OK. If the number is between one and two times the tolerance, it is labeled with a single X. If the number is between two and three times the toler-ance, it is labeled as XX. If the number is greater than three times the tolerance, it is labeled as XXX (the more X’s, the greater the severity).

The number is evaluated by taking the horizontal and vertical movement on each target and calculating the total movement on each target. The largest movement of the two is then divided by the distance between the heads (dimension C) to determine the angle of deflection caused by loosening a hold-down bolt. This angle is compared to the tolerance for final evaluation for that foot.

The advantage of this method is that it uses a combination of horizontal and ver-tical movements on the target to determine the problem feet. Experience has shown that approximately 20% of the soft foot conditions cause a horizontal move because of a severely bent foot.

NoteThe tolerance can be changed in UltraMgr and downloaded to the analyzer. See “Tolerances” on page 3-193 for more information on loading tolerances to the analyzer.

FDI EvaluationThe Frame Distortion Index provides you with a sense of severity with numbers.

Caution!Do not mistake these numbers for shim values.

When the numbers are calculated, they are compared against the tolerance (usu-ally excellent <2 mils and acceptable <3 mils). If a particular foot is in the excellent range, the number is plain. If the foot is acceptable, it will have a clear box around the number. If the foot is out-of-tolerance, it will have a solid box around the number. The higher the number, the greater the severity.

B-3

Page 376: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteThe tolerance can be changed in UltraMgr and downloaded to the analyzer. See “Tolerances” on page 3-193 for more information on loading tolerances to the analyzer.

The number is evaluated by measuring the vertical angle and applying it to an old millwright’s “rule of thumb”. It is:

FDI = 2 x Vertical Angle x Inboard to Outboard Foot Distance

Vertical angle is measured at the shafts when the hold-down bolts are loosened and the Inboard to Outboard Distance is the distance from the front to the back feet of the component being measured (dimensions A or E in the Machine Dimensions screen). This value is compared to the tolerance for final evaluation for that foot.

The disadvantage of this method is that it uses only vertical movement to deter-mine the problem feet (and the numbers are commonly mistaken for shim correc-tion values). However, this is the only method currently used by Prüftechnic alignment products.

B-4 -

Page 377: 2130 Laser Alignment

Appendix C

Technical Specifications

Model 8215/8225 Laser Alignment Fixtures Specifications

Specification Description

Laser Diode In-Ga-Al-P, Class II (CDRH) / Class2 (IEC), Visible

Wavelength 670 nm (typical)

Output power Pulsed, <1.0 mW (average)

Laser Safety Class Class II (CDRH) / Class2 (IEC)FDA 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11

Beam Divergence <225 µrad (8215), <30 µrad (8225),

Target Size 8215: 10 mm by 10 mm (0.394 inches by 0.394 inches)8225: 20 mm by 20 mm (0.787 inches by 0.787 inches)

Target Range (typical) 8215: 9 mm by 9 mm (0.354 inches by 0.354 inches)8225: 18 mm by 18 mm (0.709 inches by 0.709 inches)

Resolution 0.0000394 inches / 0.001 mm

Linearity Better than 1.5%

Environment Protected from ambient light interference

Laser housing Aluminum

Inclinometer Internal, fully automatic

Inclinometer resolution Better than 1°

Measurement axes 6 total, 2 displacement and 1 rotational axis per laser head

Operating temperature 0° to 115° F (-17.8° C to 45° C)

Storage temperature 0° to 140° F (-17.8° C to 60° C)°

C-1

Page 378: 2130 Laser Alignment

Model 8215/8225 Laser Alignment Fixtures Specifications (continued)

Specification Description

Humidity 10 to 95%, non-condensing

Power management Auto “sleep” and “power down” modes

Battery Nickel cadmium

RF Operating FrequencyModels 821500 and 822500 Only

916.5 MHz

RF Operating RangeModels 821500 and 822500 Only

0 - 50 ft (0 - 15 m), typical

Battery life 3 - 4 hours continuous operation – 8 hours typical 1

Battery charging station Fully automatic super fast smart charger (auto-switching, 110-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz)

Battery charging time 15 minutes

Laser to analyzer communication

Cableless RF and/or direct cable connection

Minimum separation Any positive separation (faces not touching)

Maximum separation 8215: 30 ft (9 m), 8225: 100 ft. (30.5 m)

Rotational Speed 2 seconds/rev maximum

Standard mountingbracket 2

Carbon steel base – thickness 0.75 in (19 mm)(others available)

Minimum shaft diameter with standard bracket

0.625 in (16mm)

Maximum shaft diameter with standard bracket 2

26 in (660 mm) – requires chain extension for shaft diameters above 8 in (200 mm)

Vertical clearance with standard brackets 2

5.25 in (152 mm)

Calibration Calibration to NIST traceable standards

Weight of total system 33 lbs (15 kg) – includes laser heads, brackets, analyzer and accessories

1 Based on 25% laser operation, 25% sleep mode, and 50% analyzer only

2 Other brackets are available for special applications

C-2 -

Page 379: 2130 Laser Alignment

Mounting Posts (part number D23465) for Alignment Brackets

The mounting post, used to secure the laser fixture to the mounting bracket (refer to “Installing a Post” on page 2-27 for more information), can be used on the fol-lowing brackets: Carbon Steel (B821007), Soft Mount/non-Rotational (A800052), Narrow Mount (A8AA54), Quick Mount Narrow (A8AA55), Magnetic Mount (A800056), and Magnetic Base for Straightness Measurements (A8AA50). The mounting posts can also be used on the following extension blocks: 1-inch/25 mm (B8100-EXT1), 2-inch/51 mm (B8100-EXT2), and 4-inch/102 mm (B8100-EXT4).

If additional height is required to clear a coupling or other obstacle and additional extension blocks are not available or cannot be used with the mounting bracket being used, you may not have any choice but to make your own longer posts. Use the following mechanical drawing for the required dimensions, except modify the 5.00 inch (127.0 mm) length to meet your requirements.

C-3Mounting Posts (part number D23465) for Alignment Brackets

Page 380: 2130 Laser Alignment

NoteIf possible, use extension blocks instead of longer mounting posts since extension blocks offer a more stable bracket configuration, resulting in more accurate, repeatable data. Extension blocks are available only for B821007 and A800052 mounting brackets.

1

C-4 -

Page 381: 2130 Laser Alignment

Appendix D

Accessories and Optional Products

Optional Items for Laser System

Part No. DescriptionA832001 ............... Mounting Chain extension, 2 ft (660 mm), A800052 soft-mount baseD22773 ................. Mounting Chain extension, 2 ft (660 mm), B821007 standard mounting base800002 .................. Direct Connect extension cable, 8 ft (2.4m), with one straight and one right-angle

Lemo connectors800003 .................. Direct Connect extension cable, 8 ft (2.4m), with straight Lemo connectors8AA50 .................. Magnetic straightness fixtures (see 800056)800052 .................. Non-rotational (soft-mount) alignment fixturesB8100-EXT1 ........ 1-inch (25mm) extension block for B821007 and A800052 mounting basesB8100-EXT2 ........ 2-inch (51mm) extension block for B821007 and A800052 mounting basesB8100-EXT4 ........ 4-inch (102mm) extension block for B821007 and A800052 mounting basesD23465 Mounting Posts for mounting bases and 8211 Battery Charger8AA54 .................. Thin mounting brackets, 5/8 inch - 4 1/2 inches (15 - 115 mm) diameter shafts8AA55 .................. Thin mounting brackets, 3/4 inch - 20 inches (19 - 510 mm) diameter shafts800056 .................. Magnetic mounting base for couplings821510 .................. 8215/8225 Direct Connect Cable, 5 ft (1.5m)8215C2-PM .......... 8215/8225 Dual Pass Cable, 2 ft (660mm)

Other Accessories

Part No. Description8JB-050................. Portable horizontal jackbolts kit; motor sizes 2 to 300 HP8JB-100................. Portable horizontal jackbolts kit; motor sizes 300 HP+8JB-200................. Portable horizontal jackbolts kit; motor sizes 2 to 300 HP+See Price List ........ Precut stainless steel shims

D-1

Page 382: 2130 Laser Alignment

Recommended Spare Parts*

Part No. DescriptionD22745.................. Chain Clip for B8221007 and A800052 mounting bases8AA10................... CSI Tape Measure, 6 ft (2 m)

* Other spare parts are available upon request.

Analyzer Travel/Carrying Cases

Part No. DescriptionD24492.................. Hard shell case (locking) for analyzer and laser fixtures

Batteries/Analyzer Chargers

Part No. DescriptionD23465.................. Mounting posts for mounting bases and 8211 battery charger8211....................... Laser head and analyzer fast battery charger93140 .................... Analyzer battery charger/power supply, 100 to 250 VAC65010 .................... three-conductor (120V) cable for 92140 battery charger/power supply821102................... Analyzer to 8211 charger cable

Alignment Fixtures

Part No. Description8215 ...................... RF Laser Alignment Fixtures with 10 mm by 10 mm PSD’s8225 ...................... RF Laser Alignment Fixtures with 20 mm by 20 mm PSD’s

D-2 -

Page 383: 2130 Laser Alignment

Customer Support

Emerson takes great pride in our customers and is committed to providing the highest standard of customer support. Our number one priority is to provide prompt and efficient service to all of our customers. To contact our Customer Sup-port department, please call (865) 671-4274 (4CSI). To reach the Sales Support department, dial (865) 675-2110 and ask our receptionists to direct your call.

To extend the level of support to Emerson customers, we have an electronic mail system which is connected through the Internet directly to the Customer Support group. The address is:

[email protected] Support also has a Web page on the Internet. You can access it by visiting our corporate Web page at:

http://www.mhm.assetweb.com

Once there, place your cursor over Expertise on the left column and click on Product Support in the pop-up menu. There are links to specific information such as TechNotes, Software Registration, and Maintenance Quotes. Also, the following prompt provides a link to the Customer Support Web page.

Visit our Customer Service Site for additional Customer Support information.

Click on this option to access additional technical information and assistance for Emerson products.

DoctorKnow™The DoctorKnow system was originally developed to provide a means of transfer-ring high volume, ever-changing technical information to support personnel at Emerson. Because it was so successful, further enhancements were made so that it could also be provided to Emerson customers. It now provides:

• A mechanism to FAX information to the customer (while on-line) and

• Direct access to the Customer Support Web page (through the Internet — see previous section)

D-3Customer Support

Page 384: 2130 Laser Alignment

Customer Support includes file transfer capabilities. Files can be uploaded to ftp.compsys.com for Customer Support to download. Please contact Customer Support for the username and password.

Reliability Services

Emerson provides a broad range of in-plant services including startups, database troubleshooting and diagnostics. Our Machinery Health Services Group consists of qualified individuals with experience in a variety of technologies and industries. For information, call (865) 675-2400, ext. 2547.

D-4 -

Page 385: 2130 Laser Alignment

Glossary

AccuracyHow close a measurement is to the absolute quantity being measured.

AlignmentPositioning two or more machines so that the rotational centerlines of their shafts are co-linear under operating conditions.

Anchor Bolts (or Hold-down Bolts)Bolts use to anchor or hold the machine to the base or foundation.

AngularityThe angle between two machine shaft centerlines; this angle is the same at any point along either centerline. Normally specified in rise/run.

Axial Float (or End Float)Movement of one shaft along its centerline due to the freedom of movement per-mitted by a journal bearing or sleeve bearing. This adjustment should be set before performing vertical and horizontal moves.

BacklashNormally refers to the torsional play caused by the design or degraded condition of a flexible coupling.

BaseplateThe surface (often made of steel plate or cast iron) to which the feet of a machine are attached. The baseplate is normally mounted on a foundation and grout.

Baud RateUnit of speed for data transmission over a serial communications link.

Bolt BoundThe situation whereby the machine cannot be moved in the desired direction (either horizontally or vertically) because of mounting bolt restrictions, or a limited number of shims.

G-1

Page 386: 2130 Laser Alignment

Brackets (or Fixtures)Components that mount to machine shafts or couplings to measure the relative position of the centerlines of two machines.

Coefficient of Thermal ExpansionThe constant value or factor of expansion of a metal for a given increase in temper-ature per length of the metal. This is different for each type of material.

Cold Alignment (or Static Alignment, or Primary Alignment)Condition in which machines are normally aligned. Changes in off-line to on-line running conditions should be allowed for during this procedure so that the machine will “grow” into alignment during operation.

Co-linearTwo or more lines positioned in space with no offset or angularity between them.

Co-planarLying or acting in the same plane.

CPMCycles per minute. (Same as RPM.)

Current JobThe “job” that is currently active — the one that can be easily modified.

Dodd BarsA secondary alignment method.

DutchmanA tapered filler ring for squaring cocked flanges, or a ring of uniform thickness used to fill pipe gaps.

End Float See axial float.

Essinger BarsA secondary alignment method, or method to measure off-line to on-line running condition change.

G-2

Page 387: 2130 Laser Alignment

Face-rim Method (or Rim-face Method) A method of shaft alignment measurement where the indicators are mounted radi-ally and axially on one machine or the other (not both).

Fixtures See Brackets.

Foundation The surface, often made of concrete, to which the machine baseplate is mounted, often with grout between the baseplate and foundation to provide even support.

Frame Distortion IndexMethod of measuring how much a Soft Foot condition will distort a machine casting (casting distortion affects the alignment).

FrequencyNumber of times an event repeats in a specific period of time.

HertzThe measurement of frequency in cycles per second.

Hold-down BoltsThe bolts anchoring or holding the machine to the baseplate and foundation.

Inclinometer A device that indicates the rotational position of shafts.

Induced Soft FootA type of soft foot that is caused by external forces (coupling, pipe strain, etc.) acting on a machine independent of the foot to baseplate connection.

In-phaseWhen applied to alignment brackets, the term means the Move and Fixed brackets make the same angle with the horizon at each point of measurement.

Jackscrew (or Jackbolt)A bolt or screw attached to the base or foundation that is used to move or position the machine (normally horizontally but sometimes vertically) which is being moved.

G-3

Page 388: 2130 Laser Alignment

JackshaftA long shaft used as a spacer between two machines.

JobUsually identified with a number and description; represents data accumulated during an individual alignment session.

Machinery TrainThree or more machines that must be aligned to one another.

MasterWhen used as a communications term, it is the unit that controls and determines when data will be transferred.

Micrometer, OutsideTool used to measure the thickness of shims.

MilliradianA unit (normally metric) used to describe the angle of one machine shaft center-line to the other. It is the equivalent of mils/inch. It can also be expressed as rise/run (1° = 17.45 milliradians).

MilsA unit of measure for displacement (thousandths of an inch).

Mils/InchA unit (normally English) used to describe the angle of one shaft centerline to the other. It is equivalent to milliradians. It can also be expressed as rise/run (1° = 17.45 mils/inch).

ModemA device that enables remote communications between the host computer and the analyzer over telephone lines.

NotesSpecific observations that can be stored in each alignment job along with the col-lected data. These observations can be predefined notes or user-defined notes that have been created via the analyzer’s keypad, or a combination of the two methods.

G-4

Page 389: 2130 Laser Alignment

Off-line to On-line Running ConditionMovement of shaft centerlines associated with (or due to) a change in pressures, temperatures and other forces between the static and operating condition.

OffsetDistance between rotational centerlines at any given normal plane, usually mea-sured at the coupling midpoint.

PerpendicularAt right angles (90°) to a given line or plane.

Pipe StrainCasing and shaft distortion caused by improper pipe flange fitup.

Predictive MaintenanceTechnology of periodically monitoring the actual condition of machines to dis-cover faults, to determine probable time of breakdown, and to provide scheduled downtime for repair that avoids excessive cost and lost production.

Primary AlignmentSee Cold Alignment.

RBMReliability Base Maintenance — the modern maintenance management method that integrates preventive, predictive, and proactive maintenance strategies. This total management method not only improves detection methods but uses root cause analyses to find and correct the actual cause(s) of the problems thereby elim-inating unpredictable failures in the future.

RepeatabilityThe consistency (or variation) of readings and results between consecutive sets of measurements.

ResolutionThe smallest change or amount that a measurement system can detect.

Reverse Indicator MethodMethod for taking shaft alignment reading with indicators mounted radially at opposite ends of a spanned section (on each machine).

G-5

Page 390: 2130 Laser Alignment

Rim and Face MethodSee Face-rim Method.

Rise/RunFor smaller angles, the ratio obtained when the change in offset between two cen-terlines is divided by the distance along either centerline (between the points of offset measurement). In effect, it is the slope of one line in a plane compared to another line in the same plane. Angularity is normally specified in mils/inch, or milliradians which is rise/run.

RotorThe part (or assembly of parts) of a machine that spins or revolves as a single unit. For alignment purposes, the shafts of both machines are the rotors.

RS232A serial, asynchronous communication standard; a type designation for cables that are used to connect communications ports on host computer, analyzer, and tele-phone modems.

SagDeflection due to gravity acting on a cantilevered or otherwise supported object. Mechanical brackets always sag a certain amount. This sag must be corrected for if machine moves are to be calculated correctly.

Secondary AlignmentThe act of measuring off-line to on-line machine movement.

ShimA thin piece of metal material inserted between the base and machine feet to pro-duce precise vertical adjustments of the machine centerline.

SlaveWhen used as a communications term, it is the unit that is controlled when data is transferred.

Soft FootA term used to describe any condition where tightening or loosening the bolt(s) of a single foot distorts the machine frame. Also the name of a method used to mea-sure this condition.

G-6

Page 391: 2130 Laser Alignment

SpacersA generic term for any coupling that has two flex planes separated by a connecting shaft without bearings or other supports (between the flex points). Sometimes called an insert or spider.

Spool PieceAny piece of pipe or shafting which can be removed from a line of piping or shafting without disturbing or disassembling any other components. The name spool piece comes from the physical appearance of the piece, often a short cylinder with flanges on the ends, that resembles a spool of string or thread.

Squishy FootA type of soft foot characterized by material (could be shims, paint, rust, grease, oil, dirt, etc.) acting like a spring between the underside of the machine foot and the baseplate contact area.

Static AlignmentSee Cold Alignment.

Stored JobA job that has been stored in memory. All the data related to that particular job will then be available for activation.

TIRTotal Indicator Runout. The total movement in mils that an indicator would read after the shaft is rotated 180° or 360°.

Thermal GrowthMovement of shaft centerlines associated with (or due to) a change in machinery temperature between the static and operating condition.

Thermal ProfileA secondary alignment method used to measure thermal growth.

Torsional PlayThe relative rotation between two coupled shafts that will cause the fixtures to move out of phase with each other (also called backlash).

G-7

Page 392: 2130 Laser Alignment

ToleranceThe maximum permissible deviation from a specified alignment position, defining the limits of offset at the coupling center and angularity.

UltraMgrMachinery Health Manager’s database management software package used to store technology specific information, such as alignment or balance job details.

Unassigned JobA job that has not been assigned to stations and machines in the UltraMgr data-base.

Wedge ShimUse of several shims to fill the wedge shaped gap of a bent foot. Each shim is inserted to a different depth so that a stair-step shaped support is built to better sup-port the entire foot.

G-8

Page 393: 2130 Laser Alignment

Index

Numerics8000-I, connecting 2-34 to 2-35

AAuto Sweep 2-33, 2-44

Bbattery

usage, laser heads 2-16block

adding 2-inch 2-48completed 3-inch extension 2-49mounting 1-inch 2-47

bracketmounting on coupling 2-50

CCase Studies 3-195chain clip, using the 2-26chain, extension kits 2-51Communication, RF 2-32

DDirect Connect 2-37Dual Pass 2-9, 2-45

Llaser beams, rough alignment 2-42 to 2-44laser fixtures

adjustment 2-41interference with 2-18

operating temperature 2-18setup overview 2-18

LED Functionality 2-9

Mmachine alignment, causes of changes in A-6machine coupling

checking A-6correct A-6

machine foundation preparation A-5manual, organization of the 1-1model 8211 smart charger 2-11model 8215/8225

care and handling 2-10fixtures checklist 2-6

modified jobs 3-197mounting base

attaching chain to 2-19chain length table 2-51excess chain 2-24 to 2-25installing post in 2-27leveling 2-22mounting on shaft >8-inches 2-51using chain clip 2-26

mounting blockchain tightening range 2-21vertical extension ranges 2-49

mounting sensor heads 2-28 to 2-31

Ooperating precautions 2-17optional accessories D-1

I-1

Page 394: 2130 Laser Alignment

Ppipes

minimizing strain A-6thermal growth of A-6

preparing machine foundations A-5

Rreplacing the sensor battery 2-12rough alignment 2-42 to 2-44

Sscreen

offset and angle 3-193, 3-201sensor head

beginning installation 2-28communication range 2-33turning on 2-40

shaft alignmentcommon mistakes in A-2early methods of A-2examples A-3major steps in A-1overview A-1pre-job preparation A-5

shaft misalignmenttypes of A-4

spare parts D-2

Tthermal growth A-6

different expansion rates A-7Tolerances 3-193, 3-201tolerances, Emerson recommended 3-202types of shaft misalignment A-4

UUltraMgr

compatibility 3-199database advantages 3-199overview 3-199

UltraMgr/2120overview 3-194 to ??

UltraMgr/FAST Bal IIoperating cases 3-195 to 3-196

I-2